2004 Nissan Armada 46054

B ENGINE
EC
SECTION
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM C
E
CONTENTS
INDEX FOR DTC ........................................................ 8 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ........................... 62 F
Alphabetical Index .................................................... 8 OBD System Operation Chart ................................ 65
DTC No. Index ........................................................11 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 70
PRECAUTIONS ........................................................ 15 Trouble Diagnosis Introduction ............................... 70 G
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................. 75
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- Fail-safe Chart ........................................................ 76
SIONER” ................................................................ 15 Basic Inspection ..................................................... 78
H
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and Symptom Matrix Chart ............................................ 83
A/T .......................................................................... 15 Engine Control Component Parts Location ............ 87
Precaution .............................................................. 15 Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 93
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ................ 18 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ............. 95 I
PREPARATION ......................................................... 19 ECM Terminals and Reference Value ..................... 95
Special Service Tools ............................................. 19 CONSULT-II Function ........................................... 102
Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 21 Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function ....................... 113 J
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM .................................. 22 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor ..... 116
System Diagram ..................................................... 22 Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor
Vacuum Hose Drawing ........................................... 23 Mode ..................................................................... 119
K
System Chart ......................................................... 24 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE. 121
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System .................... 25 Description ............................................................ 121
Electronic Ignition (EI) System ............................... 27 Testing Condition .................................................. 121
Nissan Torque Demand (NTD) Control System ..... 28 Inspection Procedure ............................................ 121 L
Air Conditioning Cut Control ................................... 29 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 122
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCI-
Speed) .................................................................... 29 DENT ....................................................................... 125 M
CAN communication .............................................. 30 Description ............................................................ 125
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE .............................. 31 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 125
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check .................... 31 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ........... 126
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 126
Adjustment ............................................................. 32 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 127
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning ...... 43 Ground Inspection ................................................ 131
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning ................ 43 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE. 133
Idle Air Volume Learning ........................................ 43 Description ............................................................ 133
Fuel Pressure Check .............................................. 45 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 133
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ............ 48 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 133
Introduction ............................................................ 48 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 134
Two Trip Detection Logic ........................................ 48 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 135
Emission-related Diagnostic Information ................ 49 DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER. 136
NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS) Description ............................................................ 136
... 62 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 136
Revision: January 2005 EC-1 2004 Pathfinder Armada

On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 136 Component Inspection .......................................... 178
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 137 Removal and Installation ....................................... 178
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 138 DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR ........................................ 179
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 141 Component Description ........................................ 179
Component Inspection .......................................... 143 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 179
Removal and Installation ...................................... 143 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 179
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR ..................................... 144 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 180
Component Description ........................................ 144 Component Inspection .......................................... 181
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Removal and Installation ....................................... 181
. 144 DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION ................. 182
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 144 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 182
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 145 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 182
Overall Function Check ........................................ 146 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 182
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 147 Component Inspection .......................................... 182
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 148 Removal and Installation ....................................... 183
Component Inspection .......................................... 151 DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 ..................................... 184
Removal and Installation ...................................... 151 Component Description ........................................ 184
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR ......................... 152 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Component Description ........................................ 152 .184
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 184
. 152 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 185
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 152 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 186
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 153 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 189
Component Inspection .......................................... 158 DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 ..................................... 194
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR ........................... 159 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 160 Overall Function Check ......................................... 195
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 161 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 197
Component Inspection .......................................... 162 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 200
Removal and Installation ...................................... 162 Component Inspection .......................................... 203
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR .......................... 163 Removal and Installation ....................................... 205
Component Description ........................................ 163 DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 163 FUNCTION .............................................................. 206
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 164 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 206
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 165 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 206
Component Inspection .......................................... 167 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 210
Removal and Installation ...................................... 168 DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR ............................ 169 FUNCTION .............................................................. 215
Component Description ........................................ 169 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 215
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 215
. 169 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 217
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 169 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 219
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 170 DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR ...................................... 223
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 171 Component Description ........................................ 223
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 172 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 223
Component Inspection .......................................... 175 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 223
Removal and Installation ...................................... 175 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 225
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR ...................................... 176 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 226
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 176 Removal and Installation ....................................... 228
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 177 DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR .......................... 229
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................

DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 229 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 274
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 230 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 274 A
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 231 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 275
Component Inspection ......................................... 232 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 276
Removal and Installation ...................................... 233 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOL- EC
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR ........................... 234 UME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ...................... 283
Component Description ........................................ 234 Description ............................................................ 283
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 234 . 283 C
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 234 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 284
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 235 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 284
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 236 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 285 D
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 237 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 287
Component Inspection ......................................... 240 Component Inspection .......................................... 288
Removal and Installation ...................................... 240 Removal and Installation ...................................... 289 E
DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MIS- DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL
FIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MISFIRE ..................... 241 VALVE ..................................................................... 290
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 241 Component Description ........................................ 290
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 241 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode F
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 242 . 290
DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS .................. 248 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 290
Component Description ........................................ 248 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 291 G
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 248 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 292
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 248 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 293
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 249 Component Inspection .......................................... 295 H
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 250 DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
Component Inspection ......................................... 252 SENSOR ................................................................. 297
I
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) .......................... 253 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Component Description ........................................ 253 . 297
. 253 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 298 J
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 253 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 298
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 253 Component Inspection .......................................... 299
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 254 DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE K
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 255 SENSOR ................................................................. 300
Component Inspection ......................................... 258 Component Description ........................................ 300
Removal and Installation ...................................... 258 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode L
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SEN- . 300
SOR (PHASE) ......................................................... 259 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 300
Component Description ........................................ 259 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 301
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 259 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 302 M
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 260 Component Inspection .......................................... 305
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 261 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
Component Inspection ......................................... 264 SENSOR ................................................................. 306
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNC- CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
TION ........................................................................ 265 . 306
Overall Function Check ........................................ 266 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 308
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................ 269 Component Inspection .......................................... 313
System Description .............................................. 269 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 314
Overall Function Check ........................................ 270 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 316
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 271 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 322

Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 325 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 356
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ....................... 332 Component Inspection .......................................... 358
Component Description ........................................ 332 Removal and Installation ....................................... 358
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 332 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY ........................ 359
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 332 Component Description ........................................ 359
DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ....................... 334 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 360
Component Description ........................................ 334 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 361
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 334 DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
Overall Function Check ........................................ 334 ACTUATOR ............................................................. 363
Removal and Installation ...................................... 335 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 363
DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIR- DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 363
CUIT ........................................................................ 336 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 364
Component Description ........................................ 336 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 336 FUNCTION .............................................................. 365
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 336 Description ............................................................ 365
DTC P0500 VSS ...................................................... 338 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 366
Description ............................................................ 338 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 367
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 338 Remove and Installation ....................................... 370
Overall Function Check ........................................ 338 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 339 RELAY ..................................................................... 371
DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM ....................................... 340 Component Description ........................................ 371
Description ............................................................ 340 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 340 .371
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 340 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 371
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 341 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 371
DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM ....................................... 342 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 373
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 342 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR ......... 376
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR ...................................... 344 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 376
Component Description ........................................ 344 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 377
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 378
. 344 Component Inspection .......................................... 379
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 344 DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 ..................................... 381
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 345 Component Description ........................................ 381
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 346 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Component Inspection .......................................... 348 .381
Removal and Installation ...................................... 348 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 381
DTC P0605 ECM ..................................................... 349 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 382
Component Description ........................................ 349 Overall Function Check ......................................... 382
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 350 Component Inspection .......................................... 390
DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 Removal and Installation ....................................... 392
HEATER .................................................................. 352 DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 ..................................... 393
Description ............................................................ 352 Component Description ........................................ 393
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 352 .393

DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 394 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 435 A
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 396 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 440
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 399 Removal and Installation ...................................... 442 EC
Component Inspection ......................................... 402 DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1 ....................... 443
DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL .... 405 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 405 . 443 C
DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT ......................... 406 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 443
Description ........................................................... 406 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 443
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 406 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 445 D
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 406 Removal and Installation ...................................... 451
DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE ............ 407 DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1 ....................... 452 E
Description ........................................................... 407 Component Description ........................................ 452
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 407 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 407 . 452
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 407 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 452 F
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE ....... 408 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 452
Description ........................................................... 408 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 454
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 457 G
. 408 Removal and Installation ...................................... 460
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 409 DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1 ....................... 461
Overall Function Check ........................................ 409 Component Description ........................................ 461 H
Wiring Diagram .....................................................411 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Main 12 Causes of Overheating ........................... 417 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 461
I
Component Inspection ......................................... 417 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 461
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR ........................................ 418 Overall Function Check ........................................ 462
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 418 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 467 J
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 418 Removal and Installation ...................................... 469
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 419 DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1 ....................... 470
Removal and Installation ...................................... 419 Component Description ........................................ 470 K
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR ........................................ 420 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Component Description ........................................ 420 . 470
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 420 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 470 L
Removal and Installation ...................................... 421 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 476
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY ................ 422 Removal and Installation ...................................... 481 M
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 422 DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1 ....................... 482
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 423 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1 ....................... 427 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 482
Component Description ........................................ 427 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 483
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 485
. 427 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 488
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 427 Removal and Installation ...................................... 493
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 427 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 429 CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ............................... 494
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 432 Description ............................................................ 494
Removal and Installation ...................................... 434 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1 ....................... 435 . 494
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 495
. 435 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 496

Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 498 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR ......................... 540
Component Inspection .......................................... 501 Component Description ........................................ 540
Removal and Installation ...................................... 501 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL .540
VALVE ..................................................................... 502 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 540
Component Description ........................................ 502 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 541
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 542
. 502 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 543
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 503 Removal and Installation ....................................... 546
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 504 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR ........................................ 547
Component Inspection .......................................... 506 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH ................ 508 .547
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 548
. 508 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 549
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 508 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 550
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 509 Component Inspection .......................................... 553
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 510 Removal and Installation ....................................... 553
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 512 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR ...................................... 554
Component Inspection .......................................... 513 Component Description ........................................ 554
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ...................... 515 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 515 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 555
Component Inspection .......................................... 523 IGNITION SIGNAL .................................................. 561
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH ...................................... 524 Component Description ........................................ 561
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 567
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 524 INJECTOR CIRCUIT ............................................... 573
Overall Function Check ........................................ 525 Component Description ........................................ 573
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 526 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 527 .573
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH ................................. 529 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 574
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Component Inspection .......................................... 578
. 529 Removal and Installation ....................................... 578
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 529 FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT ............................................. 579
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 529 Description ............................................................ 579
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 530 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 531 .579
Component Inspection .......................................... 533 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 580
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR ......................... 534 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 581
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Removal and Installation ....................................... 584
. 534 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR .................. 585
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 534 Component Description ........................................ 585
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 535 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 586
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 536 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 587
Component Inspection .......................................... 539 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ................................ 590
Removal and Installation ...................................... 539 Description ............................................................ 590

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode (ORVR) .................................................................... 610
. 590 System Description ............................................... 610 A
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ......................................... 591 Component Inspection .......................................... 613
Component Description ........................................ 591 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ............... 615 EC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Description ............................................................ 615
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 592 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD). 617
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 593 System Description ............................................... 617 C
Component Inspection ......................................... 597 Component Description ........................................ 618
ASCD INDICATOR ................................................. 598 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 619
Component Description ........................................ 598 Fuel Pressure ....................................................... 619 D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Idle Speed and Ignition Timing ............................. 619
. 598 Calculated Load Value .......................................... 619
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 599 Mass Air Flow Sensor ........................................... 619 E
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 600 Intake Air Temperature Sensor ............................. 619
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR ..................... 601 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ................... 619
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 601 A/F Sensor 1 Heater ............................................. 619
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ..................... 603 Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater .......................... 619 F
Description ........................................................... 603 Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) ....................... 619
Component Inspection ......................................... 606 Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) .................... 619
Removal and Installation ...................................... 607 Throttle Control Motor ........................................... 619 G
How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage ..................... 607 Injector .................................................................. 620
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY Fuel Pump ............................................................ 620
H

INDEX FOR DTC
INDEX FOR DTC PFP:00024
Alphabetical Index UBS00CFD
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-133, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
×:Applicable —: Not applicable
DTC*1
Items MIL lighting
CONSULT-II Trip Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms) up
ECM*3
GST*2
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1271 1271 2 × EC-427
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1272 1272 2 × EC-435
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1273 1273 2 × EC-443
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1274 1274 2 × EC-452
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276 1276 2 × EC-461
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1278 1278 2 × EC-470
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1279 1279 2 × EC-482
A/F SEN1 (B2) P1281 1281 2 × EC-427
A/F SEN1 (B2) P1282 1282 2 × EC-435
A/F SEN1 (B2) P1283 1283 2 × EC-443
A/F SEN1 (B2) P1284 1284 2 × EC-452
A/F SEN1 (B2) P1286 1286 2 × EC-461
A/F SEN1 (B2) P1288 1288 2 × EC-470
A/F SEN1 (B2) P1289 1289 2 × EC-482
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P1031 1031 2 × EC-352
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P1032 1032 2 × EC-352
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) P1051 1051 2 × EC-352
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) P1052 1052 2 × EC-352
A/T INTERLOCK P1730 1730 1 × AT-136
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 0744 2 × AT-118
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 1 × EC-534
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 1 × EC-534
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 1 × EC-540
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 1 × EC-540
APP SENSOR P2138 2138 1 × EC-554
ASCD BRAKE SW P1572 1572 1 — EC-515
ASCD SW P1564 1564 1 — EC-508
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 0710 2 × AT-128
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 2 — EC-529
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 1000*4 1 × EC-133
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001*4 2 — EC-133

CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 2 × EC-253
CLOSED LOOP-B1 P1148 1148 1 × EC-405
CLOSED LOOP-B2 P1168 1168 1 × EC-405
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 2 × EC-259
CTP LEARNING P1225 1225 2 — EC-418
CTP LEARNING P1226 1226 2 — EC-420

INDEX FOR DTC
DTC*1
Items MIL lighting A
ECM*3
GST*2
CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 2 × EC-241 EC
CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 0302 2 × EC-241
CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 0303 2 × EC-241
CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 0304 2 × EC-241 C
CYL 5 MISFIRE P0305 0305 2 × EC-241
CYL 6 MISFIRE P0306 0306 2 × EC-241
D
CYL 7 MISFIRE P0307 0307 2 × EC-241
CYL 8 MISFIRE P0308 0308 2 × EC-241
D/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1762 1762 1 × AT-154 E
D/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1764 1764 1 × AT-157
ECM P0605 0605 1 or 2 × or — EC-349
F
ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT P1065 1065 2 × EC-359
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0117 0117 1 × EC-163
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0118 0118 1 × EC-163 G
ECT SENSOR P0125 0125 1 × EC-176
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 1 × EC-408
H
ETC ACTR P1121 1121 1 × EC-363
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P1122 1122 1 × EC-365
ETC MOT P1128 1128 1 × EC-376 I
ETC MOT PWR P1124 1124 1 × EC-371
ETC MOT PWR P1126 1126 1 × EC-371
EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 0455 2 × EC-314
J
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P0441 0441 2 × EC-269
EVAP SMALL LEAK P0442 0442 2 × EC-274
K
EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0451 0451 2 × EC-297
EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0452 0452 2 × EC-300
EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0453 0453 2 × EC-306 L
EVAP VERY SML LEAK P0456 0456 2 × EC-322
FR/B SOLENOID FNCT P1759 1759 1 × AT-151
M
FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1757 1757 1 × AT-148
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0182 0182 2 × EC-229
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0183 0183 2 × EC-229
FTT SENSOR P0181 0181 2 × EC-223
FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH P0460 0460 2 × EC-332
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR P0461 0461 2 × EC-334
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0462 0462 2 × EC-336
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0463 0463 2 × EC-336
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 P0171 0171 2 × EC-206
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2 P0174 0174 2 × EC-206
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 2 × EC-215
FUEL SYS-RICH-B2 P0175 0175 2 × EC-215
HLR/C SOL FNCTN P1769 1769 1 × AT-163

INDEX FOR DTC
DTC*1
Items MIL lighting
2 ECM*3
GST*
HLR/C SOL/CIRC P1767 1767 1 × AT-160
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 2 × EC-184
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 2 × EC-194
HO2S2 (B1) P1146 1146 2 × EC-381
HO2S2 (B1) P1147 1147 2 × EC-393
HO2S2 (B2) P0158 0158 2 × EC-184
HO2S2 (B2) P0159 0159 2 × EC-194
HO2S2 (B2) P1166 1166 2 × EC-381
HO2S2 (B2) P1167 1167 2 × EC-393
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0037 0037 2 × EC-136
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0038 0038 2 × EC-136
HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0057 0057 2 × EC-136
HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0058 0058 2 × EC-136
I/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1752 1752 1 × AT-142
I/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1754 1754 1 × AT-145
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0112 0112 2 × EC-159
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0113 0113 2 × EC-159
IAT SENSOR P0127 0127 2 × EC-179
ISC SYSTEM P0506 0506 2 × EC-340
ISC SYSTEM P0507 0507 2 × EC-342
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 2 — EC-248
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 0745 2 × AT-121
LC/B SOLENOID FNCT P1774 1774 1 × AT-169
LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1772 1772 1 × AT-166
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0101 0101 1 × EC-144
MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 2 × EC-241
NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 2 — BL-125
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING P0000 0000 — — —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 1706 2 × EC-524
PNP SW/CIRC P0705 0705 2 × AT-106
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0444 0444 2 × EC-283
PW ST P SEN/CIRC P0550 0550 2 — EC-344
SENSOR POWER/CIRC P1229 1229 1 × EC-422
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 0740 2 × AT-115

INDEX FOR DTC
DTC*1
ECM*3
GST*2
TCM P0700 0700 1 × AT-105 EC
TCS C/U FUNCTN P1211 1211 2 — EC-406
TCS/CIRC P1212 1212 2 — EC-407
THERMSTAT FNCTN P0128 0128 2 × EC-182 C
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 1 × EC-234
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 1 × EC-234
D
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0122 0122 1 × EC-169
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0123 0123 1 × EC-169
TP SENSOR P2135 2135 1 × EC-547 E
TURBINE REV S/CIRC P1716 1716 2 × AT-131
TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0420 2 × EC-265
F
TW CATALYST SYS-B2 P0430 0430 2 × EC-265
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*5 P0720 0720 2 × AT-109
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*5 P0500 0500 2 × EC-338 G

VENT CONTROL VALVE P0447 0447 2 × EC-290
VENT CONTROL VALVE P1446 1446 2 × EC-502
H
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012.
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). This number is controlled by NISSAN.
*4: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II. I
*5: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur at the same time, the MIL illuminates.
DTC No. Index UBS00CFE

J
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-133, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . K
×:Applicable —: Not applicable
DTC*1
Items MIL lighting
CONSULT-II Trip Reference page L
2 ECM*3
GST*
U1000 1000*4 CAN COMM CIRCUIT 1 × EC-133
M
U1001 1001*4 CAN COMM CIRCUIT 2 — EC-133
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
P0000 0000 FURTHER TESTING — — —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P0037 0037 HO2S2 HTR (B1) 2 × EC-136
P0038 0038 HO2S2 HTR (B1) 2 × EC-136
P0057 0057 HO2S2 HTR (B2) 2 × EC-136
P0058 0058 HO2S2 HTR (B2) 2 × EC-136
P0101 0101 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT 1 × EC-144
P0112 0112 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-159
P0113 0113 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-159
P0117 0117 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT 1 × EC-163

INDEX FOR DTC
DTC*1
Items MIL lighting
2 ECM*3
GST*
P0118 0118 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT 1 × EC-163
P0122 0122 TP SEN 2/CIRC 1 × EC-169
P0123 0123 TP SEN 2/CIRC 1 × EC-169
P0125 0125 ECT SENSOR 1 × EC-176
P0127 0127 IAT SENSOR 2 × EC-179
P0128 0128 THERMSTAT FNCTN 2 × EC-182
P0138 0138 HO2S2 (B1) 2 × EC-184
P0139 0139 HO2S2 (B1) 2 × EC-194
P0158 0158 HO2S2 (B2) 2 × EC-184
P0159 0159 HO2S2 (B2) 2 × EC-194
P0171 0171 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 2 × EC-206
P0172 0172 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 2 × EC-215
P0174 0174 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2 2 × EC-206
P0175 0175 FUEL SYS-RICH-B2 2 × EC-215
P0181 0181 FTT SENSOR 2 × EC-223
P0182 0182 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-229
P0183 0183 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-229
P0222 0222 TP SEN 1/CIRC 1 × EC-234
P0223 0223 TP SEN 1/CIRC 1 × EC-234
P0300 0300 MULTI CYL MISFIRE 2 × EC-241
P0301 0301 CYL 1 MISFIRE 2 × EC-241
P0302 0302 CYL 2 MISFIRE 2 × EC-241
P0303 0303 CYL 3 MISFIRE 2 × EC-241
P0304 0304 CYL 4 MISFIRE 2 × EC-241
P0305 0305 CYL 5 MISFIRE 2 × EC-241
P0306 0306 CYL 6 MISFIRE 2 × EC-241
P0307 0307 CYL 7 MISFIRE 2 × EC-241
P0308 0308 CYL 8 MISFIRE 2 × EC-241
P0327 0327 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 2 — EC-248
P0335 0335 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-253
P0340 0340 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 2 × EC-259
P0420 0420 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 2 × EC-265
P0430 0430 TW CATALYST SYS-B2 2 × EC-265
P0441 0441 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON 2 × EC-269
P0442 0442 EVAP SMALL LEAK 2 × EC-274
P0444 0444 PURG VOLUME CONT/V 2 × EC-283
P0447 0447 VENT CONTROL VALVE 2 × EC-290
P0451 0451 EVAP SYS PRES SEN 2 × EC-297

INDEX FOR DTC
DTC*1
ECM*3
GST*2
P0452 0452 EVAP SYS PRES SEN 2 × EC-300 EC
P0453 0453 EVAP SYS PRES SEN 2 × EC-306
P0455 0455 EVAP GROSS LEAK 2 × EC-314
P0456 0456 EVAP VERY SML LEAK 2 × EC-322 C
P0460 0460 FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH 2 × EC-332
P0461 0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 2 × EC-334
D
P0462 0462 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC 2 × EC-336
P0463 0463 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC 2 × EC-336
P0500 0500 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC* 5 2 × EC-338 E
P0506 0506 ISC SYSTEM 2 × EC-340
P0507 0507 ISC SYSTEM 2 × EC-342
F
P0550 0550 PW ST P SEN/CIRC 2 — EC-344
P0605 0605 ECM 1 or 2 × or — EC-349
P0700 0700 TCM 1 × G
P0705 0705 PNP SW/CIRC 2 × AT-106
P0710 0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC 2 × AT-128
H
P0720 0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*5 2 × AT-109
P0740 0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC 2 × AT-115
P0744 0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN 2 × AT-118 I
P0745 0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC 2 × AT-121
P1031 1031 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) 2 × EC-352
J
P1032 1032 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) 2 × EC-352
P1051 1051 A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) 2 × EC-352
P1052 1052 A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) 2 × EC-352 K
P1065 1065 ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-359
P1121 1121 ETC ACTR 1 × EC-363
L
P1122 1122 ETC FUNCTION/CIRC 1 × EC-365
P1124 1124 ETC MOT PWR 1 × EC-371
P1126 1126 ETC MOT PWR 1 × EC-371 M
P1128 1128 ETC MOT 1 × EC-376
P1146 1146 HO2S2 (B1) 2 × EC-381
P1147 1147 HO2S2 (B1) 2 × EC-393
P1148 1148 CLOSED LOOP-B1 1 × EC-405
P1166 1166 HO2S2 (B2) 2 × EC-381
P1167 1167 HO2S2 (B2) 2 × EC-393
P1168 1168 CLOSED LOOP-B2 1 × EC-405
P1211 1211 TCS C/U FUNCTN 2 — EC-406
P1212 1212 TCS/CIRC 2 — EC-407
P1217 1217 ENG OVER TEMP 1 × EC-408
P1225 1225 CTP LEARNING 2 — EC-418
P1226 1226 CTP LEARNING 2 — EC-420
P1229 1229 SENSOR POWER/CIRC 1 × EC-422

INDEX FOR DTC
DTC*1
Items MIL lighting
2 ECM*3
GST*
P1271 1271 A/F SENSOR (B1) 2 × EC-427
P1272 1272 A/F SENSOR (B1) 2 × EC-435
P1273 1273 A/F SENSOR (B1) 2 × EC-443
P1274 1274 A/F SENSOR (B1) 2 × EC-452
P1276 1276 A/F SENSOR (B1) 2 × EC-461
P1278 1278 A/F SENSOR (B1) 2 × EC-470
P1279 1279 A/F SENSOR (B1) 2 × EC-482
P1281 1281 A/F SENSOR (B2) 2 × EC-427
P1282 1282 A/F SENSOR (B2) 2 × EC-435
P1283 1283 A/F SENSOR (B2) 2 × EC-443
P1284 1284 A/F SENSOR (B2) 2 × EC-452
P1286 1286 A/F SENSOR (B2) 2 × EC-461
P1288 1288 A/F SENSOR (B2) 2 × EC-470
P1289 1289 A/F SENSOR (B2) 2 × EC-482
P1446 1446 VENT CONTROL VALVE 2 × EC-502
P1564 1564 ASCD SW 1 — EC-508
P1572 1572 ASCD BRAKE SW 1 — EC-515
P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 NATS MALFUNCTION 2 — BL-125
P1706 1706 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-524
P1716 1716 TURBINE REV S/CIRC 2 × AT-131
P1730 1730 A/T INTERLOCK 1 × AT-136
P1752 1752 I/C SOLENOID/CIRC 1 × AT-142
P1754 1754 I/C SOLENOID FNCTN 1 × AT-145
P1757 1757 FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC 1 × AT-148
P1759 1759 FR/B SOLENOID FNCT 1 × AT-151
P1762 1762 D/C SOLENOID/CIRC 1 × AT-154
P1764 1764 D/C SOLENOID FNCTN 1 × AT-157
P1767 1767 HLR/C SOL/CIRC 1 × AT-160
P1769 1769 HLR/C SOL FNCTN 1 × AT-163
P1772 1772 LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC 1 × AT-166
P1774 1774 LC/B SOLENOID FNCT 1 × AT-169
P1805 1805 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT 2 — EC-529
P2122 2122 APP SEN 1/CIRC 1 × EC-534
P2123 2123 APP SEN 1/CIRC 1 × EC-534
P2127 2127 APP SEN 2/CIRC 1 × EC-540
P2128 2128 APP SEN 2/CIRC 1 × EC-540
P2135 2135 TP SENSOR 1 × EC-547
P2138 2138 APP SENSOR 1 × EC-554
*4: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II.

PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001
A
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER” UBS00CVL
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along EC
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front C
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Man-
ual.
WARNING: D
● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be per-
formed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. E
● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per-
sonal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section. F
● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
G
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T UBS00CFG
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration. H
CAUTION:
● Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery cable before any
repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, I
etc. will cause the MIL to light up.
● Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease, J
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
● Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-
locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-66, "HAR- K
NESS CONNECTOR" .
● Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness
with a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to the short circuit. L
● Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to the malfunction of the EVAP system or fuel injection system,
etc.
M
● Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and
TCM (Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Precaution UBS00CFH
● Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.

● Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is
running.
● Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness con-
nector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative
battery cable. Failure to do so may damage the ECM
because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition
switch is turned OFF.
● Before removing parts, turn ignition switch OFF and then
disconnect battery ground cable.
SEF289H

PRECAUTIONS
● Do not disassemble ECM.

● If a battery cable is disconnected, the memory will return to
the ECM value.
The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial value.
Engine operation can vary slightly when the terminal is dis-
connected. However, this is not an indication of a malfunc-
tion. Do not replace parts because of a slight variation.
PBIB1164E
● When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten it

securely with a lever as far as it will go as shown in the fig-
ure.
BBIA0387E
● When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or

from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
● Securely connect ECM harness connectors.
A poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge)
voltage to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in
damage to ICs.
● Keep engine control system harness at least 10 cm (4 in)
away from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control sys- PBIB0090E
tem malfunctions due to receiving external noise, degraded

operation of ICs, etc.
● Keep engine control system parts and harness dry.
● Before replacing ECM, perform ECM Terminals and Refer-
ence Value inspection and make sure ECM functions prop-
erly. Refer to EC-95, "ECM Terminals and Reference Value" .
● Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage.
● Do not disassemble mass air flow sensor.
● Do not clean mass air flow sensor with any type of deter-
gent.
● Do not disassemble electric throttle control actuator.
● Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause seri-
ous incidents. MEF040D
● Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE),

crankshaft position sensor (POS).

PRECAUTIONS
● After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform DTC

Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check. A
The DTC should not be displayed in the DTC Confirmation
Procedure if the repair is completed. The Overall Function
Check should be a good result if the repair is completed.
EC
SEF217U
D
● When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never
allow the two tester probes to contact.
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and E
damage the ECM power transistor.
● Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's F
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
G
SEF348N
K
● B1 indicates the bank 1, B2 indicates the bank 2 as shown

in the figure. L
PBIB1144E

PRECAUTIONS
● Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines.

● Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque.
BBIA0402E
● Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting.

● Immediately after starting, do not rev up engine unneces-
sarily.
● Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown.
SEF709Y
● When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure

to observe the following as it may adversely affect elec-
tronic control systems depending on installation location.
– Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic
control units.
– Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away
from the harness of electronic controls.
Do not let them run parallel for a long distance.
– Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standing-
wave radio can be kept smaller.
SEF708Y
– Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis UBS00CFI
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:

● GI-15, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams"
● PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" for power distribution circuit
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
● GI-11, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES"
● GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident"

PREPARATION
PREPARATION PFP:00002
A
Special Service Tools UBS00CFJ
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
EC
(Kent-Moore No.) Description
Tool name
EG17650301 Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap and ra-
(J-33984-A) diator filler neck C
Radiator cap tester a: 28 (1.10) dia.
adapter b: 31.4 (1.236) dia.
c: 41.3 (1.626) dia.
Unit: mm (in) D
S-NT564
KV10117100 Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors E

(J36471-A) with 22 mm (0.87 in) hexagon nut
Heated oxygen sensor
wrench
F
S-NT379
G
KV10114400 Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors
(J-38365) a: 22 mm (0.87 in)
Heated oxygen sensor
wrench H
S-NT636
I
(J-44626) Loosening or tightening air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sen-
sor wrench J
K
LEM054
(J44321) Checking fuel pressure

Fuel pressure gauge L
kit
LEC642
(J-44321-6) Connecting fuel pressure gauge to quick connec-

Fuel pressure adapter tor type fuel lines.
LBIA0376E
(J-45488) Remove fuel tube quick connectors in engine

Quick connector re- room.
lease
PBIC0198E

PREPARATION
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.) Description
Tool name
KV109E0010 Measuring the ECM signals with a circuit tester
(J-46209)
Break-out box
S-NT825
KV109E0080 Measuring the ECM signals with a circuit tester

(J-45819)
Y-cable adapter
S-NT826
(J-23688) Checking concentration of ethylene glycol in en-

Engine coolant refrac- gine coolant
tometer
WBIA0539E

PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools UBS00CFK
A
Tool name
Description
(Kent-Moore No.)
Leak detector Locating the EVAP leak
EC
i.e.: (J41416)
S-NT703
D
EVAP service port Applying positive pressure through EVAP service
adapter port
i.e.: (J41413-OBD)
E
S-NT704 F
Fuel filler cap adapter Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening
i.e.: (MLR-8382) pressure
G
H
S-NT815
Socket wrench Removing and installing engine coolant tempera-

ture sensor I
S-NT705
Oxygen sensor thread Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before K

cleaner installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with anti-
i.e.: (J-43897-18) seize lubricant shown below.
(J-43897-12) a: 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5 mm for Zirco-
nia Oxygen Sensor L
b: 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25 mm for Tita-
nia Oxygen Sensor
AEM488
M
Anti-seize lubricant Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool
i.e.: (PermatexTM when reconditioning exhaust system threads.
133AR or equivalent
meeting MIL specifica-
tion MIL-A-907)
S-NT779

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:23710
System Diagram UBS00CFL
PBIB2051E

Vacuum Hose Drawing UBS00CFM
EC
PBIB2052E
Refer to EC-22, "System Diagram" for Vacuum Control System.

System Chart UBS00CFN
Input (Sensor) ECM Function Output (Actuator)

● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Fuel injection & mixture ratio control Fuel injector
● Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Electronic ignition system Power transistor
● Mass air flow sensor ● Electric throttle control actuator
● Engine coolant temperature sensor Nissan torque demand control system
● Fuel injector
● A/F sensor 1
Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay
● Throttle position sensor
ASCD vehicle speed control Electric throttle control actuator
● Accelerator pedal position sensor
● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch On board diagnostic system MIL (On the instrument panel)*4
● Intake air temperature sensor A/F sensor 1 heater control A/F sensor 1 heater
● Power steering pressure sensor Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
● Ignition switch
EVAP canister purge volume control
● Battery voltage EVAP canister purge flow control
solenoid valve
● Knock sensor
Air conditioning cut control Air conditioner relay*4
● Refrigerant pressure sensor
● Stop lamp switch
Cooling fan control Cooling fan relay*4
● ASCD steering switch
● ASCD brake switch
● Fuel level sensor*1 *3
● EVAP control system pressure sensor
● Fuel tank temperature sensor*1
● Heated oxygen sensor 2*2 ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS for EVAP system EVAP canister vent control valve
● TCM (Transmission control module)*3
● ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)*3
● Air conditioner switch*3
● Wheel sensor*3
● Electrical load signal*3
*1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system. This is used only for the on board diagnosis.
*2: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions.
*3: This input signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*4: This output signal is sent from the ECM through CAN communication line.

Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System UBS00CFO
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART A

Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*3 EC
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Piston position
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air

Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature C
A/F sensor 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
D
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position
Fuel injection
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position
& mixture ratio Fuel injector
Knock sensor Engine knocking condition control E
Battery 3
Battery voltage*
Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation
F
Heated oxygen sensor 2*1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)*2 VDC/TCS operation command
G
Air conditioner switch*2 Air conditioner operation
Wheel sensor*2 Vehicle speed

*1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions. H
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*3: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION I
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of
time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the
ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined J
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from both the crankshaft position sensor (POS), camshaft
position sensor (PHASE) and the mass air flow sensor.
VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION K
In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operat-
ing conditions as listed below.
<Fuel increase> L
● During warm-up
● When starting the engine
● During acceleration M
● Hot-engine operation
● When selector lever is changed from N to D
● High-load, high-speed operation
<Fuel decrease>
● During deceleration
● During high engine speed operation

MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)
SEF503YB
The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission control.
The three way catalyst (manifold) can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses air
fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor whether the engine operation is rich or lean. The
ECM adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about air
fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1, refer to EC-427 . This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichiometric
(ideal air-fuel mixture).
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 is located downstream of the three way catalyst (manifold). Even if the switching
characteristics of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal
from heated oxygen sensor 2.
Open Loop Control
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback
control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
● Deceleration and acceleration
● High-load, high-speed operation
● Malfunction of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 or its circuit
● Insufficient activation of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature
● High engine coolant temperature
● During warm-up
● After shifting from N to D
● When starting the engine
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from A/F sensor 1.
This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to the theoret-
ical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as originally
designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot wire) and characteristic changes dur-
ing operation (i.e., injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio.
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is
then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between
the two ratios.
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim
includes short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim.
“Short term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical
value. The signal from A/F sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN compared to the the-
oretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and an increase in
fuel volume if it is lean.
“Long term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation
of the short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences,
wear over time and changes in the usage environment.

FUEL INJECTION TIMING

A
EC
PBIB0122E D
Two types of systems are used.
Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used E
when the engine is running.
Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System
F
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all eight cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of
the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.
The eight injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle.
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating. G
FUEL SHUT-OFF
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration or operation of the engine at excessively high speeds. H
Electronic Ignition (EI) System UBS00CFP
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

I
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*2

Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Piston position
J
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Throttle position sensor Throttle position K
Ignition timing
Power transistor
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position control
Knock sensor Engine knocking
L
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position
Battery Battery voltage*2
M
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-
fuel ratio for every running condition of the engine. The ignition tim-
ing data is stored in the ECM. This data forms the map shown.
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and
camshaft position sensor signal. Computing this information, ignition
signals are transmitted to the power transistor.
e.g., N: 1,800 rpm, Tp: 1.50 msec
A °BTDC
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the
ECM according to the other data stored in the ECM.
● At starting SEF742M
● During warm-up

● At idle
● At low battery voltage
● During acceleration
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed
within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not
operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition.
The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition.
Nissan Torque Demand (NTD) Control System UBS00CFQ

Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position
Electric throttle con-
Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation NTD control trol actuator and fuel
injector
Battery Battery voltage
TCM (CAN communication) A/T control signal
Air conditioner switch*1 Air conditioner operation
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)*1 VDC/TCS/ABS operation
Electrical load*1 Electrical load signal

*1: Signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NTD control system decides the target traction based on the accelerator operation status and the current driv-
ing condition. It then selects the engine torque target by correcting running resistance and atmospheric pres-
sure, and controlling the power-train. Using electric throttle control actuator, it achieves the engine torque
development target which corresponds linearly to the driver's accelerator operation.
Running resistance correction control compares the engine torque estimate value, measured vehicle acceler-
ation, and running resistance on a flat road, and estimates vehicle weight gain and running resistance varia-
tion caused by slopes to correct the engine torque estimate value.
Atmospheric pressure correction control compares the engine torque estimate value from the airflow rate and
the target engine torque for the target traction, and estimates variation of atmospheric pressure to correct the
target engine torque. This system achieves powerful driving without reducing engine performance in the prac-
tical speed range in mountains and high-altitude areas.

Air Conditioning Cut Control UBS00CFR
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART A

Air conditioner switch*1 Air conditioner ON signal

EC
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) C
Engine speed*2
Air conditioner
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Air conditioner relay
cut control
D
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure
Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation E
1 Vehicle speed
Wheel sensor*
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. F
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used. G
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned off.
● When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
● When cranking the engine. H
● At high engine speeds.
● When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high.
● When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed. I
● When engine speed is excessively low.
● When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high.
J
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed) UBS00CFS

Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator K
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Neutral position
L
Fuel cut control Fuel injector
Engine speed
M
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
If the engine speed is above 1,400 rpm under no load (for example, the shift position is neutral and engine
speed is over 1,400 rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies
based on engine speed.
Fuel cut will be operated until the engine speed reaches 1,000 rpm, then fuel cut will be cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System, EC-25 .

CAN communication UBS00CFT
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
Refer to LAN-5, "CAN Communication Unit" , about CAN communication for detail.

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE PFP:00018

A
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check UBS00CFU
IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II EC
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
E
SEF058Y
With GST
Check idle speed with GST. F
IGNITION TIMING
Any of following two methods may be used. G
Method A
1. Attach timing light to loop wire near No. 1 ignition coil as shown.
NOTE: H
Do not use loop wire located near No. 2 ignition coil.
2. Check ignition timing.
I
BBIA0377E
K
Method B
1. Remove No. 1 ignition coil.
L
BBIA0360E
2. Connect No. 1 ignition coil and No. 1 spark plug with suitable
high-tension wire as shown, and attach timing light clamp to this
wire.
BBIA0378E

SEF011V
3. Check ignition timing.
BBIA0379E
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment UBS00CFV
PREPARATION
1. Make sure that the following parts are in good order.
● Battery
● Ignition system
● Engine oil and coolant levels
● Fuses
● ECM harness connector
● Vacuum hoses
● Air intake system

(Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.)
● Fuel pressure
● Engine compression
● Throttle valve
● Evaporative emission system
2. On air conditioner equipped models, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is OFF.
3. On automatic transmission equipped models, when checking idle rpm, ignition timing and mixture ratio,
checks should be carried out while shift lever is in N position.
4. When measuring CO percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe.
5. Turn off headlamp, heater blower, rear window defogger.
6. Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead.

OVERALL INSPECTION SEQUENCE

A
EC
PBIB2061E

INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. INSPECTION START
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for
scheduled maintenance.
2. Open engine hood and check the following:
– Harness connectors for improper connections
– Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut
– Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
– Hoses and ducts for leaks
– Air cleaner clogging
– Gasket
3. Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied.
– Headlamp switch is OFF. SEF983U
– Air conditioner switch is OFF.

– Rear window defogger switch is OFF.
– Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
4. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature
indicator points the middle of gauge.
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm.
SEF976U
5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no

load.
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
SEF977U
2. REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure.
>> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED A

With CONSULT-II
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load.
EC
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no
load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.
E
SEF978U
3. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) F
SEF058Y
I
Without CONSULT-II
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no load, then run engine at idle speed for about J
1 minute.
3. Check idle speed.
K
650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. L
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING M

1. Stop engine.
2. Perform EC-43, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 5.
5. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING

Perform EC-43, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 6.

6. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING

Perform EC-43, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 7.
No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.
7. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Without CONSULT-II
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 8.
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-259 .
● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-253 .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4.
9. CHECK ECM FUNCTION

1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is a rare case.)
2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-127, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .
>> GO TO 4.

10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING A

1. Run engine at idle.
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
EC
15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 19. C
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 20.
NG >> GO TO 11.
D
BBIA0379E
E
11. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1. Stop engine.
F
>> GO TO 12. G

Perform EC-43, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . H
>> GO TO 13.
I
Perform EC-43, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . J
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 14. K
2. GO TO 4.
L
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. M
Without CONSULT-II
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 17.

15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN

OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 19.
NG >> GO TO 16.
BBIA0379E
16. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION

Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-35 .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation.
2. GO TO 4.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
2. GO TO 4.

>> GO TO 4.

19. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION A

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at a least 10 seconds.
EC
3. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position with “OD” OFF.
NOTE:
C
Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.
4. Set “OD” ON, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30
MPH).
D
NOTE:
Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal.
5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 five times.
E
6. Stop the vehicle and connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
7. Make sure that no (1st trip) DTC is displayed in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode.
OK or NG F
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 21.
20. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION G
With GST
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at a least 10 seconds. H
I
NOTE:
J
MPH).
NOTE:
K
6. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle.
7. Make sure that no (1st trip) DTC is displayed. L
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 21. M

21. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HARNESS

1. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery ground cable.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to EC-429, "Wiring Diagram" .
Bank 1 Bank 2
ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal
2 4 24 4
16 1 76 1
35 5 57 5
56 6 58 6
75 2 77 2
Continuity should exist.

5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 22.
NG >> 1. Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors between ECM
and A/F sensor 1.
2. GO TO 4.

1. Reconnect ECM harness connector.
>> GO TO 23.

>> GO TO 24.

Refer to EC-43, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Yes or No
Yes (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 25.
Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 26.
2. GO TO 4.

25. CHECK CO% A

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points the middle of gauge.
EC
2. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
3. Select “ENG COOLANT TEMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Set “ENG COOLANT TEMP” to 5°C (41°F) by touching “DWN”
C
and “Qd”.
5. Start engine and rev it (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times
under no load, then run engine at idle speed.
D
6. Check CO%.
Idle CO: 3 − 11% and engine runs smoothly.
OK or NG E
OK >> GO TO 28.
NG >> GO TO 27.
SEF172Y
F
26. CHECK CO%
Without CONSULT-II G
1. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of gauge.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
H
3. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
4. Connect a resistor (4.4 kΩ) between terminals of engine coolant
temperature sensor harness connector.
I
5. Start engine and rev it (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times
under no load, then run engine at idle speed.
6. Check CO%.
J
Idle CO: 3 − 11% and engine runs smoothly.
7. After checking CO%, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect the
resistor from the terminals of engine coolant temperature sensor K
harness connector, and then connect engine coolant tempera-
ture sensor harness connector to engine coolant temperature SEF982UA
sensor. L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 28.
NG >> GO TO 27. M
27. RECONNECT AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HARNESS CONNECTOR
2. Reconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
>> GO TO 31.
28. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1

1. Stop engine.
2. Replace A/F sensor 1 on the malfunctioning bank.
With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 29.

Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 30.

29. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION

With CONSULT-II
NOTE:
MPH).
NOTE:
6. Stop the vehicle and connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
7. Make sure that no (1st trip) DTC is displayed in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 31.
30. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION

With GST
NOTE:
MPH).
NOTE:
7. Make sure that no (1st trip) DTC is displayed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 31.

● Check fuel pressure regulator, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-46, "FUEL PRESSURE
CHECK" .
● Check mass air flow sensor and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-144 and EC-
152 .
● Check injector and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-573 .
● Check engine coolant temperature sensor and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-
163 and EC-176 .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 33.
2. GO TO 32.

32. ERASE UNNECESSARY DTC A

After this inspection, unnecessary DTC might be displayed.
Erase the stored memory in ECM and TCM. Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAG-
NOSTIC INFORMATION" and AT-37, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" . EC
>> GO TO 4.
C
this is a rare case.) D
E
>> GO TO 4.
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning UBS00CFW F
DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accel-
erator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time G
harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. H
2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. I
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning UBS00CFX J
DESCRIPTION
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by
monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of K
electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. L
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound. M
Idle Air Volume Learning UBS00CFY
DESCRIPTION
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific
range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
● Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
● Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PREPARATION
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied.
Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment.
● Battery voltage: More than 12.9V (At idle)
● Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F)
● PNP switch: ON
● Electric load switch: OFF
(Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger)

On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine
is started, the headlamp will not be illuminated.
● Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
● Vehicle speed: Stopped
● Transmission: Warmed-up
For models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/T”
system indicates less than 0.9V.
For models without CONSULT-II, drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
2. Perform EC-43, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
SEF217Z
6. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds.
SEF454Y
7. Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If

“CMPLT” is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be
carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the inci-
dent by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure below.
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle
speed and ignition timing are within the specifications.
ITEM SPECIFICATION
Idle speed 650±50 rpm (in P or N position)
Ignition timing 15±5° BTDC (in P or N position)
MBIB0238E
Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
● It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
● It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.


3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. A
4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
EC
6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds.
7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. C
b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops
blinking and turned ON. D
9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON.
10. Start engine and let it idle.
11. Wait 20 seconds. E
H
SEC897C
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the
specifications. I
ITEM SPECIFICATION
Idle speed 650±50 rpm (in P or N position) J
Ignition timing 15±5° BTDC (in P or N position)
13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried
out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCE- K
DURE below.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
L
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed.
2. Check PCV valve operation.
M
3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage.
4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condi-
tion are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident.
It is useful to perform EC-121, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform Idle air volume learning all over again:
● Engine stalls.
● Erroneous idle.
Fuel Pressure Check UBS00CFZ
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE

With CONSULT-II

2. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT”

mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
SEF214Y
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R.
2. Start engine.
3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
BBIA0380E
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK

CAUTION:
● Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
● Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel
pressure cannot be completely released because A60 models do not have fuel return system.
● Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the
quick connector o-ring maintains sealability.
● Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel pressure.
● Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical system operating (i.e. lights, rear defog, A/C,
etc.). Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine loads and changes in
manifold vacuum.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-45, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
2. Remove engine cover.
3. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488.
Refer to EM-29, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
● Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
● Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.
● Keep fuel hose connections clean.
BBIA0389E

4. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure

Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown in figure. A
● Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pres-
sure gauge adapter.
● When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for EC
damage and abnormality.
5. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for
fuel leakage. C
6. Start engine and check for fuel leakage.
7. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. BBIA0390E
● During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel D
connection every 3 minutes.
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi) E

8. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step.
9. Check the following.
● Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
F
● Fuel filter for clogging
● Fuel pump
G
● Fuel pressure regulator for clogging
If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator.

If NG, repair or replace. H
10. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel pressure
to zero. Refer to EC-45, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
I

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM PFP:00028
Introduction UBS00CG0
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actua-
tors. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including:
Emission-related diagnostic information SAE Mode
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Mode 3 of SAE J1979
Freeze Frame data Mode 2 of SAE J1979
System Readiness Test (SRT) code Mode 1 of SAE J1979
1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC) Mode 7 of SAE J1979
1st Trip Freeze Frame data
Test values and Test limits Mode 6 of SAE J1979
Calibration ID Mode 9 of SAE J1979
The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below.
×: Applicable —: Not applicable
Freeze Frame 1st trip Freeze
DTC 1st trip DTC SRT code Test value
data Frame data
CONSULT-II × × × × × —
GST × × × — × ×
ECM × ×* — — — —
*: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other.
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected
in two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-76,
"Fail-safe Chart" .)
Two Trip Detection Logic UBS00CG1
When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in the
ECM memory. The MIL will not light up at this stage. <1st trip>
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored in
the ECM memory, and the MIL lights up. The MIL lights up at the same time when the DTC is stored. <2nd
trip> The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to light up or blink the MIL,
and store DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below.
MIL DTC 1st trip DTC
1st trip 2nd trip 2nd trip
Items 1st trip 2nd trip 1st trip
Lighting Lighting display-
Blinking Blinking displaying displaying displaying
up up ing
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst

damage) — DTC: P0300 - P0308 is × — — — — — × —
being detected
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst
damage) — DTC: P0300 - P0308 is — — × — — × — —
being detected
One trip detection diagnoses (Refer
— × — — × — — —
to EC-8, "INDEX FOR DTC" .)
Except above — — — × — × × —
When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting MIL up when there is
malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means
of operating fail-safe function.

The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected, and demands the
driver to repair the malfunction. A
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut
Emission-related Diagnostic Information UBS00CG2

EC
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS
DTC*1 Test value/ C

Items Reference
CONSULT-II SRT code Test limit 1st trip DTC
(CONSULT-II screen terms) page
ECM*3 (GST only)
GST*2
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 1000*5 — — — EC-133 D
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001*5 — — × EC-133

NO DTC IS DETECTED. E
FURTHER TESTING P0000 0000 — — — —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0037 0037 × × × EC-136
F
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0038 0038 × × × EC-136
HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0057 0057 × × × EC-136
HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0058 0058 × × × EC-136 G
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0101 0101 — — — EC-144
H
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0112 0112 — — × EC-159
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0113 0113 — — × EC-159 I
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0117 0117 — — — EC-163
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0118 0118 — — — EC-163
J
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0122 0122 — — — EC-169
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0123 0123 — — — EC-169
ECT SENSOR P0125 0125 — — — EC-176 K
IAT SENSOR P0127 0127 — — × EC-179
THERMSTAT FNCTN P0128 0128 — — × EC-182
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 — × × EC-184 L
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 × × × EC-194
HO2S2 (B2) P0158 0158 — × × EC-184
M
HO2S2 (B2) P0159 0159 × × × EC-194
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 P0171 0171 — — × EC-206
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 — — × EC-215
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2 P0174 0174 — — × EC-206
FUEL SYS-RICH-B2 P0175 0175 — — × EC-215
FTT SENSOR P0181 0181 — — × EC-223
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0182 0182 — — × EC-229
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0183 0183 — — × EC-229
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 — — — EC-234
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 — — — EC-234
MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 — — × EC-241
CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 — — × EC-241
CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 0302 — — × EC-241

DTC*1 Test value/

Items Reference
ECM*3 (GST only)
GST*2
CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 0303 — — × EC-241
CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 0304 — — × EC-241
CYL 5 MISFIRE P0305 0305 — — × EC-241
CYL 6 MISFIRE P0306 0306 — — × EC-241
CYL 7 MISFIRE P0307 0307 — — × EC-241
CYL 8 MISFIRE P0308 0308 — — × EC-241
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 — — × EC-248
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 — — × EC-253
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 — — × EC-259
TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0420 × × × EC-265
TW CATALYST SYS-B2 P0430 0430 × × × EC-265
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P0441 0441 × × × EC-269
EVAP SMALL LEAK P0442 0442 × × × EC-274
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0444 0444 — — × EC-283
VENT CONTROL VALVE P0447 0447 — — × EC-290
EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0451 0451 — — × EC-297
EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 0455 — × × EC-314
EVAP VERY SML LEAK P0456 0456 ×* 6 × × EC-322
FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH P0460 0460 — — × EC-332
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR P0461 0461 — — × EC-334
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0462 0462 — — × EC-336
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0463 0463 — — × EC-336
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC* 4 P0500 0500 — — × EC-338

ISC SYSTEM P0506 0506 — — × EC-340
ISC SYSTEM P0507 0507 — — × EC-342
PW ST P SEN/CIRC P0550 0550 — — × EC-344
ECM P0605 0605 — — × or — EC-349
TCM P0700 0700 — — — AT-105
PNP SW/CIRC P0705 0705 — — × AT-106
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 0710 — — × AT-128
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*4 P0720 0720 — — × AT-109

TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 0740 — — × AT-115
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 0744 — — × AT-118
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 0745 — — × AT-121
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P1031 1031 × × × EC-352
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P1032 1032 × × × EC-352

DTC*1 Test value/

Items Reference A
ECM*3 (GST only)
GST*2
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) P1051 1051 × × × EC-352 EC
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) P1052 1052 × × × EC-352
ECM BACK UP/CIRC P1065 1065 — — × EC-359
ETC ACTR P1121 1121 — — — EC-363 C
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P1122 1122 — — — EC-365
ETC MOT PWR P1124 1124 — — — EC-371
D
ETC MOT PWR P1126 1126 — — — EC-371
ETC MOT P1128 1128 — — — EC-376
HO2S2 (B1) P1146 1146 × × × EC-381 E
HO2S2 (B1) P1147 1147 × × × EC-393
CLOSED LOOP-B1 P1148 1148 — — — EC-405
F
HO2S2 (B2) P1166 1166 × × × EC-381
HO2S2 (B2) P1167 1167 × × × EC-393
CLOSED LOOP-B2 P1168 1168 — — — EC-405 G
TCS C/U FUNCTN P1211 1211 — — × EC-406
TCS/CIRC P1212 1212 — — × EC-407
H
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 — — — EC-408
CTP LEARNING P1225 1225 — — × EC-418
CTP LEARNING P1226 1226 — — × EC-420 I
SENSOR POWER/CIRC P1229 1229 — — — EC-422
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1271 1271 — — × EC-427
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1272 1272 — — × EC-435
J
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1273 1273 — — × EC-443
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1274 1274 — — × EC-452
K
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1276 1276 — — × EC-461
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1278 1278 × × × EC-470
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1279 1279 × × × EC-482 L
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1281 1281 — — × EC-427
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1282 1282 — — × EC-435
M
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1283 1283 — — × EC-443
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1284 1284 — — × EC-452
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1286 1286 — — × EC-461
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1288 1288 × × × EC-470
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1289 1289 × × × EC-482
VENT CONTROL VALVE P1446 1446 — — × EC-502
ASCD SW P1564 1564 — — — EC-508
ASCD BRAKE SW P1572 1572 — — — EC-515
P1610 -
NATS MALFUNCTION 1610 - 1615 — — × BL-125
P1615
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 1706 — — × EC-524
TURBINE REV S/CIRC P1716 1716 — — × AT-131
A/T INTERLOCK P1730 1730 — — — AT-136

DTC*1 Test value/

Items Reference
ECM*3 (GST only)
GST*2
I/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1752 1752 — — — AT-142
I/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1754 1754 — — — AT-145
FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1757 1757 — — — AT-148
FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1759 1759 — — — AT-151
D/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1762 1762 — — — AT-154
D/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1764 1764 — — — AT-157
HLR/C SOL/CIRC P1767 1767 — — — AT-160
HLR/C SOL FNCTN P1769 1769 — — — AT-163
LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1772 1772 — — — AT-166
LC/B SOLENOID FNCT P1774 1774 — — — AT-169
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 — — × EC-529
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 — — — EC-534
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 — — — EC-534
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 — — — EC-540
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 — — — EC-540
TP SENSOR P2135 2135 — — — EC-547
APP SENSOR P2138 2138 — — — EC-554
*5: The trouble shooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II.
*6: SRT code will not be set it the self-diagnostic result is NG.
DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC

The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic
result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip
DTC will not be displayed.
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not
light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required
driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the
2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up. In other words,
the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consec-
utive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd
trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or light up the MIL during the
1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory.
Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in EC-61, "HOW
TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to EC-49, "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC
INFORMATION ITEMS" . These items are required by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/
component. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously are also displayed on CONSULT-II.
1st trip DTC is specified in Mode 7 of SAE J1979. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without lighting up the MIL and
therefore does not warn the driver of a malfunction. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent the vehi-
cle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests.
When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame
data as specified in Work Flow procedure Step II, refer to EC-71, "WORK FLOW" . Then perform DTC Confir-
mation Procedure or Overall Function Check to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the malfunction is dupli-
cated, the item requires repair.
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.

With CONSULT-II
With GST A
CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P1148, P1706, etc.
These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.) EC
No Tools
The number of blinks of the MIL in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results) indicates the DTC.
Example: 0340, 1148, 1706, etc.
These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN. C
● 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
● Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, GST or the Diagnostic Test Mode II do not indi-
D
cate whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to nor-
mal. CONSULT-II can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if
available) is recommended.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunc- E
tion is displayed in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode of CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many
times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be [0]. F
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be [1t].
PBIB0911E
FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA J

The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant tem-
perature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, base fuel schedule and intake
air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected. K
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II or
GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For L
details, see EC-105, "Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data" .
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority
for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once M
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol-
lowing priorities to update the data.
Priority Items
Freeze frame data Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0308
1
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175
2 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)
3 1st trip freeze frame data
For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd
trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated
from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different mal-
function is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is
stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or 1st
trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and freeze
frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged in the
ECM memory.
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM mem-
ory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE EMIS-
SION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE
System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Mode 1 of SAE J1979.
As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of
SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and com-
ponents. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed.
If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, use
the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT
status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains
“CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased.
Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer's
normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items.
NOTE:
The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM mem-
ory power supply is interrupted for several hours.
If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector will con-
tinue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the SRT items the
vehicle is returned to the customer untested.
NOTE:
If MIL is ON during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer untested even
though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT (“CMPLT”) and
DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection.
SRT Item
The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
SRT item Performance Corresponding DTC
Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”
(CONSULT-II indication) Priority*1 No.
CATALYST 2 Three way catalyst function P0420, P0430
EVAPORATIVE 2 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring P0441
SYSTEM
1 EVAP control system P0442
2 EVAP control system P0456
HO2S 2 A/F sensor 1 P1278, P1288
A/F sensor 1 P1279, P1289
Heated oxygen sensor 2 P0139, P0159
HO2S HTR 2 A/F sensor 1 heater P1031, P1032,
P1051, P1052
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater P0037, P0038,
P0057, P0058
*1: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority for
models with CONSULT-II.
SRT Set Timing

SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is
done regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and
is shown in the table below.
Example
Self-diagnosis result Ignition cycle
Diagnosis
← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON →

All OK Case 1 P0400 OK (1) — (1) OK (2) — (2)

A
P0402 OK (1) — (1) — (1) OK (2)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” EC
Case 2 P0400 OK (1) — (1) — (1) — (1)
P0402 — (0) — (0) OK (1) — (1)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2) C
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
NG exists Case 3 P0400 OK OK — —
D
P0402 — — — —
NG
P1402 NG — NG (Consecutive E
NG)
(1st trip) DTC
1st trip DTC — 1st trip DTC
DTC (= MIL “ON”)
F
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT”
OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK.
NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG.
G
—: Self-diagnosis is not carried out.
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT will
indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 1 above H
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate
“CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. → Case 2 above
If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses showed NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indi-
cate “CMPLT”. → Case 3 above I
The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is one (1) for each
self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state
emissions inspection, it is unnecessary for each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the following J
reasons:
● The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result.
● The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results. K
● When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT, the self-diagno-
sis memory must be erased from ECM after repair.
● If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”. L
NOTE:
SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out
prior to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”. M
SRT Service Procedure
If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review
the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next page.

SEF573XA
*1 EC-52 *2 EC-56 *3 EC-57
How to Display SRT Code

WITH CONSULT-II
Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with
CONSULT-II.
For items whose SRT codes are set, a “CMPLT” is displayed on the
CONSULT-II screen; for items whose SRT codes are not set,
“INCMP” is displayed.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for SRT code is shown at right.
“INCMP” means the self-diagnosis is incomplete and SRT is not set.
“CMPLT” means the self-diagnosis is complete and SRT is set.
WITH GST
Selecting MODE 1 with GST (Generic Scan Tool) SEF935Z

How to Set SRT Code

To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each A
diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions.
WITH CONSULT-II
Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on Performance Priority in the table EC
on EC-54, "SRT Item" .
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained on the next page. The C
driving pattern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes.

Driving Pattern
PBIB2062E

● The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driv-
ing habits, etc. A
Zone A refers to the range where the time, required for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the
shortest.
Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed
EC
within zone A.
*: Normal conditions refer to the following:
● Sea level
C
● Flat road
● Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
● Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions. D
Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diag-
nosis may also be performed.
Pattern 1: E
● The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F)
(where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is 3.0 - 4.3V).
● The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than F
70°C (158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is lower than 1.4V).
● The engine is started at the fuel tank temperature of warmer than 0°C (32°F) (where the voltage
between the ECM terminal 107 and ground is less than 4.1V).
G
Pattern 2:
● When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be con-
ducted. In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended. H
Pattern 3:
● The driving pattern outlined in *2 must be repeated at least 3 times.
Pattern 4: I
● Tests are performed after the engine has been operated for at least 17 minutes.
● The accelerator pedal must be held very steady during steady-state driving.
● If the accelerator pedal is moved, the test must be conducted all over again. J
*1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH), then release the accelerator pedal
and keep it released for more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h
(56 MPH) again. K
*2: Operate the vehicle in the following driving pattern.
1. Decelerate vehicle to 0 km/h (0 MPH) and let engine idle.
2. Repeat driving pattern shown at right at least 10 times. L
– During acceleration, hold the accelerator pedal as steady as
possible.
*3: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised. M
SEF414S
Suggested Transmission Gear Position

Set the selector lever in the D position.
TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-II)
The following is the information specified in Mode 6 of SAE J1979.
The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is OK or NG while
being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the
maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored.
These data (test value and test limit) are specified by Test ID (TID) and Component ID (CID) and can be dis-
played on the GST screen.

Test value (GST display)

SRT item Self-diagnostic test item DTC Test limit Conversion
TID CID
P0420 01H 01H Max. 1/128
Three way catalyst function (Bank 1)
P0420 02H 81H Min. 1
CATALYST
P0430 03H 02H Max. 1/128
Three way catalyst function (Bank 2)
P0430 04H 82H Min. 1
EVAP control system (Small leak) P0442 05H 03H Max. 1/128mm2
EVAPORA-
TIVE EVAP control system purge flow monitoring P0441 06H 83H Min. 20mV
SYSTEM
EVAP control system (Very small leak) P0456 07H 03H Max. 1/128mm2
P1271 41H 8EH Min. 5 mV
P1272 42H 0EH Max. 5 mV
P1273 43H 0EH Max. 0.002
P1274 44H 8EH Min. 0.002
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1)
P1278 45H 8EH Min. 0.004
P1276 46H 0EH Max. 5 mV
P1276 47H 8EH Min. 5 mV
P1279 48H 8EH Min. 0.004
P1281 4CH 8FH Min. 5 mV
P1282 4DH 0FH Max. 5 mV
P1283 4EH 0FH Max. 0.002
P1284 4FH 8FH Min. 0.002
HO2S A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2)
P1288 50H 8FH Min. 0.004
P1286 51H 0FH Max. 5 mV
P1286 52H 8FH Min. 5 mV
P1289 53H 8FH Min. 0.004
P0139 19H 86H Min. 10mV/500ms
P1147 1AH 86H Min. 10mV
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 1)
P1146 1BH 06H Max. 10mV
P0138 1CH 06H Max. 10mV
P0159 21H 87H Min. 10mV/500ms
P1167 22H 87H Min. 10mV
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 2)
P1166 23H 07H Max. 10mV
P0158 24H 07H Max. 10mV
P1032 57H 10H Max. 5 mV
A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 1)
P1031 58H 90H Min. 5 mV
P1052 59H 11H Max. 5 mV
A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 2)
P1051 5AH 91H Min. 5 mV
HO2S HTR
P0038 2DH 0AH Max. 20mV
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (Bank 1)
P0037 2EH 8AH Min. 20mV
P0058 2FH 0BH Max. 20mV
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (Bank 2)
P0057 30H 8BH Min. 20mV

HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION

How to Erase DTC A
With CONSULT-II
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELF-
DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. EC
If DTCs are displayed for both ECM and TCM (Transmission control module), they need to be erased individu-
ally from the ECM and TCM (Transmission control module).
NOTE: C
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-8 ), skip steps 2 through 4.
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. D
2. Turn CONSULT-II ON and touch “A/T”.
3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
4. Touch “ERASE”. [The DTC in the TCM (Transmission control module) will be erased.] Then touch “BACK” E
twice.
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
6. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. F
7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
SCIA5334E
With GST
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting MODE 4 with GST.
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-8 ), skip step 2.
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.

2. Perform AT-38, "HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST)" . (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.)
3. Select MODE 4 with GST. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
No Tools
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-8 ), skip step 3.
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once.
2. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
3. Perform AT-38, "HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS)" . (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.)
4. Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I by depressing the accelerator pedal. Refer to
EC-63, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" .
● If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost within 24
hours.
● The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
– Diagnostic trouble codes
– 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
– Freeze frame data
– 1st trip freeze frame data
– System readiness test (SRT) codes
– Test values
– Others
Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but all
of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures.
NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS) UBS00CG3
● If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch in

the “ON” position or “NATS MALFUNCTION” is displayed
on “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen, perform self-diagnostic
results mode with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.
Refer to BL-125, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-
tem-NATS)" .
● Confirm no self-diagnostic results of NVIS (NATS) is dis-
played before touching “ERASE” in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”
● When replacing ECM, initialization of NVIS (NATS) system
and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs must be SEF543X
carried out with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.

Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner. Regarding the procedures of NVIS
(NATS) initialization and NVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II operation
manual, IVIS/NVIS.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) UBS00CG4
DESCRIPTION
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON with-
out the engine running. This is a bulb check.
If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-30, "WARNING LAMPS" ,
or see EC-601, "MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR" .
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.
SEF217U

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION

The on board diagnostic system has the following 3 functions. A
Diagnostic Test KEY and ENG. Function Explanation of Function
Mode Status
EC
Mode I Ignition switch in BULB CHECK This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown,
ON position open circuit, etc.).
If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit.
C
Engine stopped
Engine running MALFUNCTION This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is

WARNING detected twice in two consecutive driving cycles (two trip E
detection logic), the MIL will light up to inform the driver
that a malfunction has been detected.
The following malfunctions will light up or blink the MIL in
F
the 1st trip.
● Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage)
● One trip detection diagnoses
G
Mode II Ignition switch in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read.
ON position RESULTS
Engine stopped
I
When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting MIL up when there is J
malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means K
of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected, and demands the
driver to repair the malfunction.
L
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut
HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE

NOTE: M
● It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
● It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
● Always ECM returns to Diagnostic Test Mode I after ignition switch is turned OFF.
How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
1. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds.
2. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
3. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 10 seconds until the MIL starts
blinking.
4. Fully release the accelerator pedal.

ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).
PBIB0092E
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)

1. Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to EC-63, "How to Set Diagnostic Test
Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" .
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for more than 10 seconds.
The emission-related diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM.
3. Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed.
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK
In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to DI-
30, "WARNING LAMPS" or see EC-601, "MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR" .
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING
MIL Condition
ON When the malfunction is detected.
OFF No malfunction.
These DTC numbers are clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MIL as shown below.
The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MIL does not illuminate in diagnostic test
mode I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MIL
illuminates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes are
displayed, they may be either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These uniden-
tified codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-II or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for how to
read a code.
PBIA3905E

A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes. The “zero” is indicated
by the number of ten flashes. The length of time the 1,000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds A
consisting of an ON (0.6-second) - OFF (0.6-second) cycle.
The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-second ON and 0.3-second OFF cycle.
A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other words, the later
EC
numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared.
A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-second OFF.
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC 0000 refers to no mal-
function. (See EC-8, "INDEX FOR DTC" ) C
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
The DTC can be erased from the back up memory in the ECM by depressing accelerator pedal. Refer to EC-
65, "How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" . D
● If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory within 24 hours.
● Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses.
E
OBD System Operation Chart UBS00CG5
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS
● When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are F
stored in the ECM memory.
● When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL will come on. For details, refer to EC-48, "Two Trip Detection G
Logic" .
● The MIL will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times with no malfunction. The drive is counted only when
the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction occurs while counting, H
the counter will reset.
● The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A)
without the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and
Fuel Injection System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times I
(driving pattern C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS” mode of CONSULT-II will count the number of times the vehicle is driven.
● The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in OK for the 2nd trip. J
SUMMARY CHART
Items Fuel Injection System Misfire Other K
MIL (goes off) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B)
DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no
80 (pattern C) 80 (pattern C) 40 (pattern A)
display) L
1st Trip DTC (clear) 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern B)
1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
*1, *2 *1, *2 1 (pattern B) M
(clear)
For details about patterns B and C under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see EC-67 .
For details about patterns A and B under “Other”, see EC-69 .
*1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected.
*2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip.

RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE
” <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
SEF392S
*1: When the same malfunction is *2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven *3: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips, 3 times (pattern B) without any mal- detected in two consecutive trips, the
MIL will light up. functions. DTC and the freeze frame data will
be stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for *6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip
will not be displayed any longer after the first time, the 1st trip DTC and freeze frame data will be cleared at
vehicle is driven 80 times (pattern C) the 1st trip freeze frame data will be the moment OK is detected.
without the same malfunction. (The stored in ECM.
DTC and the freeze frame data still
remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is *8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when
detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip vehicle is driven once (pattern C)
freeze frame data will be cleared. without the same malfunction after
DTC is stored in ECM.

EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORA-

TION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” A
<Driving Pattern B>
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system. EC
● The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
● The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction.
● The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART) C
<Driving Pattern C>

Driving pattern C means the vehicle operation as follows: D
The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time:
Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm
Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1±0.1) [%]
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition: E
● When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), T should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
● When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), T should be higher than or equal
to 70°C (158°F). F
Example:
If the stored freeze frame data is as follows:
Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F) G
To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions:
Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C
(158°F) H
● The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of vehicle conditions above.
● The C counter will be counted up when vehicle conditions above is satisfied without the same malfunction.
● The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80. I
● The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC
is stored in ECM.
J

RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR
“MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
SEF393S
*1: When the same malfunction is *2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven *3: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips, 3 times (pattern B) without any mal- detected in two consecutive trips, the
MIL will light up. functions. DTC and the freeze frame data will
be stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for *6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after
will not be displayed any longer after the first time, the 1st trip DTC and vehicle is driven once (pattern B)
vehicle is driven 40 times (pattern A) the 1st trip freeze frame data will be without the same malfunction.
without the same malfunction. stored in ECM.
(The DTC and the freeze frame data
still remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is
detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip
freeze frame data will be cleared.

EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY

DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” A
<Driving Pattern A>
EC
G
AEC574
● The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4).
● The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction. H
● The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40.
<Driving Pattern B>
I
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
● The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
J
● The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions.
● The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART).
K

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PFP:00004
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction UBS00CG6
INTRODUCTION
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel con-
trol, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM accepts
input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators. It is essen-
tial that both input and output signals are proper and stable. At the
same time, it is important that there are no malfunctions such as vac-
uum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other malfunctions with the engine.
MEF036D
It is much more difficult to diagnose an incident that occurs intermit-

tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case,
careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replace-
ment of good parts.
SEF233G
A visual check only may not find the cause of the incidents. A road
test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should
be performed. Follow EC-71, "WORK FLOW" .
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a
customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus-
tomer can supply good information about such incidents, especially
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
what conditions they occur. A Diagnostic Worksheet like the example
on EC-74 should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for conventional malfunctions first.
This will help troubleshoot driveability malfunctions on an electroni-
SEF234G
cally controlled engine vehicle.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WORK FLOW
Flow Chart A
EC
PBIB1043E
*1 If time data of “SELF-DIAG *2 If the incident cannot be verified, per- *3 If the on board diagnostic system
RESULTS” is other than [0] or [1t], form EC-125, "TROUBLE DIAGNO- cannot be performed, check main
perform EC-125, "TROUBLE DIAG- SIS FOR INTERMITTENT power supply and ground circuit.
NOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCI- INCIDENT" . Refer to EC-126, "POWER SUPPLY
DENT" . AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
*4 If malfunctioning part cannot be *5 EC-58, "Driving Pattern" *6 EC-121, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS -
detected, perform EC-125, "TROU- SPECIFICATION VALUE"
BLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMIT-
TENT INCIDENT" .

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Description for Work Flow

STEP DESCRIPTION
Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident/symptom occurred using the
STEP I
EC-73, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" .
Before confirming the concern, check and write down (print out using CONSULT-II or GST) the (1st trip) DTC and the
(1st trip) freeze frame data, then erase the DTC and the data. (Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-
RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .) The (1st trip) DTC and the (1st trip) freeze frame data can be used when
duplicating the incident at STEP III & IV.
STEP II
If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-125, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
Study the relationship between the cause, specified by (1st trip) DTC, and the symptom described by the customer.
(The Symptom Matrix Chart will be useful. See EC-83, "Symptom Matrix Chart" .)
Also check related service bulletins for information.
Try to confirm the symptom and under what conditions the incident occurs.
The DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET and the freeze frame data are useful to verify the incident. Connect CONSULT-II
STEP III to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results.
If the malfunction code is detected, skip STEP IV and perform STEP V.
Try to detect the (1st trip) DTC by driving in (or performing) the DTC Confirmation Procedure. Check and read the (1st
trip) DTC and (1st trip) freeze frame data by using CONSULT-II or GST.
During the (1st trip) DTC verification, be sure to connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)
mode and check real time diagnosis results.
STEP IV
In case the DTC Confirmation Procedure is not available, perform the Overall Function Check instead. The (1st trip)
DTC cannot be displayed by this check, however, this simplified check is an effective alternative.
The NG result of the Overall Function Check is the same as the (1st trip) DTC detection.
Take the appropriate action based on the results of STEP I through IV.
If the malfunction code is indicated, proceed to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC PXXXX.
STEP V
If the normal code is indicated, proceed to the BASIC INSPECTION. (Refer to EC-78, "Basic Inspection" .) Then per-
form inspections according to the Symptom Matrix Chart. (Refer to EC-83, "Symptom Matrix Chart" .)
Identify where to begin diagnosis based on the relationship study between symptom and possible causes. Inspect the
system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage using (tracing) “Harness Layouts”.
Gently shake the related connectors, components or wiring harness with CONSULT-II set in “DATA MONITOR
(AUTO TRIG)” mode.
Check the voltage of the related ECM terminals or monitor the output data from the related sensors with CONSULT-II.
Refer to EC-95, "ECM Terminals and Reference Value" , EC-116, "CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor" .
STEP VI
The Diagnostic Procedure in EC section contains a description based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit
inspection is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to “Circuit Inspection” in
GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .
Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
If malfunctioning part cannot be detected, perform EC-125, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCI-
DENT" .
Once you have repaired the circuit or replaced a component, you need to run the engine in the same conditions and
circumstances which resulted in the customer's initial complaint.
Perform the DTC Confirmation Procedure and confirm the normal code [DTC No. P0000] is detected. If the incident is
STEP VII still detected in the final check, perform STEP VI by using a method different from the previous one.
Before returning the vehicle to the customer, be sure to erase the unnecessary (already fixed) (1st trip) DTC in ECM
and TCM (Transmission control module). (Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC
INFORMATION" andAT-37, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" .)

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Description A
There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of
engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make trou-
bleshooting faster and more accurate. EC
In general, each customer feels differently about an incident. It is
important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a cus-
tomer complaint. C
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order
to organize all the information for troubleshooting.
Some conditions may cause the MIL to come on steady or blink and
DTC to be detected. Examples: D
● Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire. SEF907L
● Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing fuel
to evaporate into the atmosphere. E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Worksheet Sample
LEC031A

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DTC Inspection Priority Chart UBS00CG7
A
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 and/or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC EC
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-133, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
Priority Detected items (DTC)
C
1 ● U1000 U1001 CAN communication line
● P0101 P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor
● P0112 P0113 P0127 Intake air temperature sensor
D
● P0117 P0118 P0125 Engine coolant temperature sensor
● P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P1225 P1226 P2135 Throttle position sensor
● P0128 Thermostat function E
● P0181 P0182 P0183 Fuel tank temperature sensor
● P0327 P0328 P0332 P0333 Knock sensor
● P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS) F
● P0340 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
● P0460 P0461 P0462 P0463 Fuel level sensor
● P0500 Vehicle speed sensor G
● P0605 ECM
● P0705 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch
● P1229 Sensor power supply H
● P1610 - P1615 NATS
● P1706 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch
● P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor I

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Priority Detected items (DTC)

2 ● P0037 P0038 P0057 P0058 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
● P0138 P0139 P0158 P0159 P1146 P1147 P1166 P1167 Heated oxygen sensor 2
● P0441 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring
● P0444 P0445 P1444 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
● P0447 P1446 EVAP canister vent control valve
● P0451 P0452 P0453 EVAP control system pressure sensor
● P0550 Power steering pressure sensor
● P0700 P0710 P0720 P0740 P0744 P0745 P1706 P1716 P1730 P1752 P1754 P1757 P1759 P1762 P1764 P1767
P1769 P1772 P1774 A/T related sensors and solenoid valves
● P1031 P1032 P1051 P1052 A/F sensor 1 heater
● P1065 ECM power supply
● P1122 Electric throttle control function
● P1124 P1126 P1128 Electric throttle control actuator
● P1217 Engine over temperature (OVERHEAT)
● P1271 P1272 P1273 P1274 P1276 P1278 P1279 P1281 P1282 P1283 P1284 P1286 P1288 P1289 A/F sensor 1
● P1805 Brake switch
3 ● P0171 P0172 P0174 P0175 Fuel injection system function
● P0300 - P0308 Misfire
● P0420 P0430 Three way catalyst function
● P0442 P0456 EVAP control system (SMALL LEAK, VERY SMALL LEAK)
● P0455 EVAP control system (GROSS LEAK)
● P0506 P0507 Idle speed control system
● P1121 Electric throttle control actuator
● P1148 P1168 Closed loop control
● P1211 TCS control unit
● P1212 TCS communication line
● P1564 ASCD steering switch
● P1572 ASCD brake switch
Fail-safe Chart UBS00CG8
When the DTC listed below is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
P0101 Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
P0102
P0103
P0117 Engine coolant tempera- Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning
P0118 ture sensor circuit ignition switch ON or START.
CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Engine coolant temperature decided
Condition
(CONSULT-II display)
Just as ignition switch is turned
40°C (104°F)
ON or Start
More than approx. 4 minutes after
80°C (176°F)
ignition ON or Start
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
Except as shown above
(Depends on the time)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling
fan operates while engine is running.
P0122 Throttle position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
P0123 order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P0222 The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal
P0223 condition.
P2135 So, the acceleration will be poor.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

A
P1121 Electric throttle control (When electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring
actuator malfunction:)
ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the
idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm. EC
(When throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not in specified range:)
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20
degrees or less.
C
(When ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open:)
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops,
the engine stalls.
The engine can restart in N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or D
more.
P1122 Electric throttle control ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
function fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. E
P1124 Throttle control motor relay ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P1126 fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1128 Throttle control motor ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a F
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1229 Sensor power supply ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. G
P2122 Accelerator pedal position The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
P2123 sensor order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P2127 The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal
P2128 condition. H
P2138 So, the acceleration will be poor.
● When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting MIL up when
I
there is malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected
as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by
means of operating fail-safe function. J
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected, and demands
the driver to repair the malfunction.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut K

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Basic Inspection UBS00CG9
1. INSPECTION START
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for
scheduled maintenance.
2. Open engine hood and check the following:
– Harness connectors for improper connections
– Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut
– Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
– Hoses and ducts for leaks
– Air cleaner clogging
– Gasket
3. Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied.
– Head lamp switch is OFF. SEF983U
– Air conditioner switch is OFF.

– Rear window defogger switch is OFF.
– Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
4. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature
indicator points the middle of gauge.
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm.
SEF976U
5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no

load.
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
SEF977U
2. REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure.
>> GO TO 3.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
3. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED A

With CONSULT-II
EC
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no
load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.
E
SEF978U

650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) F
SEF058Y
I
Without CONSULT-II
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no load, then run engine at idle speed for about J
1 minute.
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. L
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING M

1. Stop engine.
>> GO TO 5.

>> GO TO 6.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Refer to EC-43, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 7.
2. GO TO 4.

With CONSULT-II
Without CONSULT-II
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 8.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
2. GO TO 4.

BL-125, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)" .
>> GO TO 4.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING A

EC
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END C
NG >> GO TO 11.
BBIA0379E
E
1. Stop engine.
F
>> GO TO 12. G

Perform EC-43, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . H
>> GO TO 13.
I
Refer to EC-43, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . J
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 14. K
2. GO TO 4.
L
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. M
Without CONSULT-II
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 17.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN

OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 16.
BBIA0379E
16. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION

Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-35, "TIMING CHAIN" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation.
2. GO TO 4.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
2. GO TO 4.

BL-125, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)" .
>> GO TO 4.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Symptom Matrix Chart UBS00CGA
SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM A

SYMPTOM
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

EC
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION

HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

C
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
D
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE

page
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL
E
F
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA
Fuel Fuel pump circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 EC-579
G
Fuel pressure regulator system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-45
Injector circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 EC-573
Evaporative emission system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-603 H
Air Positive crankcase ventilation sys-
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 EC-615
tem 3 3
Incorrect idle speed adjustment 1 1 1 1 1 EC-78 I
EC-363,
Electric throttle control actuator 1 1 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
EC-365
Ignition Incorrect ignition timing adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-78 J
Ignition circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-561
Main power supply and ground circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 EC-126
K
EC-144,
Mass air flow sensor circuit 2
EC-152
1
EC-163, L
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit 3 3
EC-176
EC-427,
EC-435 ,
3 EC-443 , M
A/F sensor 1 circuit EC-452 ,
1 2 2 2 2 2 EC-461 ,
EC-470 ,
EC-482
EC-169,
EC-234 ,
EC-418 ,
Throttle position sensor circuit
EC-420 ,
2 2 EC-422 ,
EC-547
EC-534,
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit 3 2 1 EC-540 ,
EC-554
Knock sensor circuit 2 3 EC-248
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit 2 2 EC-253
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit 3 2 EC-259

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYMPTOM




Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
Warranty symptom code AA ENGINE STALL
AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA
Vehicle speed signal circuit 2 3 3 3 EC-338
Power steering pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 EC-344
EC-349,
ECM 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
EC-359
PNP switch circuit 3 3 3 3 3 EC-524
Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 4 EC-585
Electrical load signal circuit 3 EC-590
ATC-33,
Air conditioner circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
MTC-31
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) 4 BRC-11
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
(continued on next page)
SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER

SYMPTOM


Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL

Fuel Fuel tank FL-10
5
Fuel piping 5 5 5 5 5 5 FL-3
Vapor lock —
5
Valve deposit —
Poor fuel (Heavy weight gaso- 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
—
line, Low octane)

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYMPTOM
A


EC


Reference C
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
D
ENGINE STALL
E

Air Air duct EM-14
F
Air cleaner EM-14
Air leakage from air duct
G
(Mass air flow sensor — electric EM-14
5 5 5 5 5 5
throttle control actuator)
5 5 5 5
Electric throttle control actuator EM-15
H
Air leakage from intake manifold/
EM-15
Collector/Gasket
Cranking Battery SC-4
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I
Generator circuit SC-17
Starter circuit 3 1 SC-10
Signal plate 6 EM-74 J
PNP switch 4 AT-106
Engine Cylinder head
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-59 K
Cylinder head gasket 4 3
Cylinder block
Piston 4 L
Piston ring
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 EM-74
Connecting rod
M
Bearing
Crankshaft
Valve Timing chain EM-35
mecha-
Camshaft EM-43
nism 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Intake valve
3 EM-59
Exhaust valve
Exhaust Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/
Gasket EM-19, EX-
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
3
Three way catalyst
Lubrica- EM-22, LU-
Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil
tion 9 , LU-10 ,
filter/Oil gallery/Oil cooler 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 LU-12
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil LU-7

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYMPTOM




Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
Warranty symptom code AA ENGINE STALL
AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA
Cooling Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap CO-10
Thermostat 5 CO-17
Water pump CO-15
Water gallery 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 5 CO-7
Cooling fan EC-408
Coolant level (Low)/Contami- 5
CO-9
nated coolant
NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System — EC-62 or
1 1
NATS) BL-125
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location UBS00CGB
EC
BBIA0452E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
BBIA0381E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC
BBIA0382E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
BBIA0383E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC
BBIA0384E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WBIA0657E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Circuit Diagram UBS00CGC
EC
BBWA1366E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
BBWA1367E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout UBS00CGD
EC
PBIB1192E D
ECM Terminals and Reference Value UBS00CGE
PREPARATION E
1. ECM is located in the engine room passenger side behind bat-
tery.
2. Remove ECM harness connector.
F
H
BBIA0386E
3. When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen it with

levers as far as they will go as shown in the figure. I
4. Connect a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST)
between the ECM and ECM harness connector.
● Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.
J
● Data is for comparison and may not be exact.
BBIA0387E
L
ECM INSPECTION TABLE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. M
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
1 B ECM ground Engine ground
● Idle speed
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
2 O/B ● Warm-up condition
(bank 1)
● Idle speed
PBIB1584E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Throttle control motor relay BATTERY VOLTAGE
3 L [Ignition switch: ON]
power supply (11 - 14V)
0 - 14V
[Ignition switch: ON]

● Engine stopped
4 L/W Throttle control motor (Close)
● Shift lever position: D
● Accelerator pedal: Released
PBIB1104E
0 - 14V

● Engine stopped
5 L/B Throttle control motor (Open)
● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
PBIB1105E
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the
following conditions are met.
– Engine: After warming up 0 - 1.0V
– Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
Heated oxygen sensor 2 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
6 GR
heater (bank 1) minute under no load
● Engine stopped BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running] (11 - 14V)
● Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.
[Engine is running]
0.5 - 4.5V
Power steering pressure ● Steering wheel is being turned.
12 R
sensor [Engine is running]
0.4 - 0.8V
● Steering wheel is not being turned.
1.0 - 2.0V
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm
at idle.
PBIB1041E
Crankshaft position sensor
13 O
(POS)
1.0 - 2.0V
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
PBIB1042E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A
COLOR
NO.
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running] EC
● Idle speed
NOTE: C
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm
at idle.
PBIB1039E
Camshaft position sensor
14 Y D
(PHASE)
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running] E
F
PBIB1040E
[Engine is running]
15 W Knock sensor 1 Approximately 2.5V
● Idle speed G
16 BR/R Approximately 3.1V
[Engine is running]
35 BR/G Approximately 2.6V
A/F sensor 1 (bank 1) ● Warm-up condition H
56 LG/B Approximately 2.3V
● Idle speed
75 P/B Approximately 2.3V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
I
● Idle speed J
NOTE:
21 O/L Injector No. 5 The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm
22 BR Injector No. 3 at idle.
23 GR/W Injector No. 1 K
PBIB0042E
40 Y/G Injector No. 6
41 P Injector No. 4 BATTERY VOLTAGE
42 L Injector No. 2
(11 - 14V) L
44 O Injector No. 7
63 G Injector No. 8 [Engine is running]
M
PBIB0043E
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
24 BR/W ● Warm-up condition
(bank 2)
● Idle speed
PBIB1584E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
– Engine: After warming up 0 - 1.0V
25 O/G
heater (bank 2) minute under no load.
EVAP control system pres-
32 L [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V
sure sensor
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Intake air temperature sen-
34 R/B [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with intake
sor
air temperature.
[Engine is running]
36 W Knock sensor 2 Approximately 2.5V
● Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
● Accelerator pedal is not depressed even
slightly, after starting engine
EVAP canister purge volume PBIB0050E

45 L/Y
control solenoid valve
11 - 14V
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More
than 100 seconds after starting engine).
PBIB0051E
0 - 0.2V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
46 L/R Ignition signal No. 7 NOTE:
60 GR/R Ignition signal No. 5 The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm
61 O/W Ignition signal No. 3 at idle.
PBIB0044E
62 Y/R Ignition signal No. 1
65 G/R Ignition signal No. 8
0.1 - 0.4V
79 V/W Ignition signal No. 6
80 W/R Ignition signal No. 4
81 W/G Ignition signal No. 2 [Engine is running]
PBIB0045E
Sensor power supply

47 Y [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
(Throttle position sensor)

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
48 SB (EVAP control system pres- [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V EC
sure sensor)
Sensor power supply
49 R/Y (Refrigerant pressure sen- [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sor)
C

● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V D
● Accelerator pedal: Fully released
50 B Throttle position sensor 1
[Ignition switch: ON] E
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed F
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition 1.1 - 1.4V
● Idle speed G
51 W Mass air flow sensor
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is 2,500 rpm. H
[Engine is running]
I
● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
Heated oxygen sensor 2 quickly after the following conditions are
55 R 0 - Approximately 1.0V
(bank 1) met.
– After keeping the engine speed between J
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at
idle for 1 minute under no load.
57 L/P Approximately 2.6V K
[Engine is running]
58 GR/G Approximately 2.3V
A/F sensor 1 (bank 2) ● Warm-up condition
76 G/L Approximately 3.1V
● Idle speed
77 BR/B Approximately 2.3V
L
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
66 R ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(Throttle position sensor) M
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
67 B Sensor ground ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
68 W/L (Power steering pressure [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sensor)
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
69 W Throttle position sensor 2
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
70 B/W Refrigerant pressure sensor 1.0 - 4.0V
● Both A/C switch and blower switch are ON.
(Compressor operates.)
Engine coolant temperature
73 Y/B [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with
sensor
engine coolant temperature.
[Engine is running]
● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
Heated oxygen sensor 2 quickly after the following conditions are
74 L 0 - Approximately 1.0V
(bank 2) met.
– After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at
idle for 1 minute under no load.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
82 B/R ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
83 G/W ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
[Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V - Battery volt-
85 G/W Data link connector
● CONSULT-II or GST is disconnected. age (11 - 14V)
Approximately 1.1 - 2.3V

86 R CAN communication line [Ignition switch: ON] Output voltage varies with the
communication status.
Sensor power supply
90 L [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
91 W/R [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 2)
Approximately 2.6 - 3.2V
94 L CAN communication line [Ignition switch: ON] Output voltage varies with the
communication status.
● Engine stopped 0.15 - 0.60V
Accelerator pedal position ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released
98 G/R
sensor 2 [Ignition switch: ON]

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 4V
● ASCD steering switch: OFF EC
Approximately 0V
● ON/OFF(MAIN) switch: Pressed
C
Approximately 4V
● ON/OFF(MAIN) switch: Released
Approximately 1V D
● CANCEL switch: Pressed
99 G/Y ASCD steering switch Approximately 4V
● CANCEL switch: Released E
Approximately 2V
● COAST/SET switch: Pressed
[Ignition switch: ON] F
Approximately 4V
● COAST/SET switch: Released
Approximately 3V G
● ACCEL/RESUME switch: Pressed
Approximately 4V
● ACCEL/RESUME switch: Released
H
[Ignition switch: OFF]
Approximately 0V
● Brake pedal: Fully released
101 R/W Stop lamp switch
[Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE I
● Brake pedal: Depressed (11 - 14V)

Approximately 0V
● Shift lever position: P or N J
102 GR/R PNP switch
[Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Except the above gear position (11 - 14V)
K
BATTERY VOLTAGE
104 O Throttle control motor relay (11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V
L
106 BR/W M
Fuel tank temperature sen-
107 V/R [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with fuel
sor
tank temperature.
Approximately 0V
● Brake pedal: Depressed
108 BR/W ASCD brake switch
● Brake pedal: Fully released (11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: OFF] 0V

109 B/R Ignition switch BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
● For a few seconds after turning ignition
ECM relay switch OFF
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than a few seconds after turning igni- (11 - 14V)
tion switch OFF
● For 1 second after turning ignition switch
0 - 1.5V
ON
113 GR Fuel pump relay [Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than 1 second after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch ON
115 B/R [Engine is running]

ECM ground Engine ground
116 B/W ● Idle speed
EVAP canister vent control BATTERY VOLTAGE
117 L/Y [Ignition switch: ON]
valve (11 - 14V)
119 BR BATTERY VOLTAGE
Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON]
120 BR (11 - 14V)
Power supply for ECM BATTERY VOLTAGE
121 W [Ignition switch: OFF]
(Back-up) (11 - 14V)
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
CONSULT-II Function UBS00CGF
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode Function
This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the
Work support
indications on the CONSULT-II unit.
Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data
Self-diagnostic results
can be read and erased quickly.*1
Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.
Input/Output of the specification for Basic fuel schedule, AFM, A/F feedback control value and the
Data monitor (SPEC)
other data monitor items can be read.
CAN diagnostic support
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
monitor
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also
Active test
shifts some parameters in a specified range.
DTC & SRT confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.
Function test This mode is used to inform customers when their vehicle condition requires periodic maintenance.
ECM part number ECM part number can be read.
*1: The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
● Diagnostic trouble codes
● 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
● Freeze frame data
● 1st trip freeze frame data
● System readiness test (SRT) codes
● Test values
● Others

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION

DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
A
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC DTC & SRT

RESULTS DATA CONFIRMATION
Item WORK DATA EC
MONI- ACTIVE DTC
SUP- FREEZE MONI-
TOR TEST SRT WORK
PORT DTC*1 FRAME TOR
(SPEC) STATUS SUP-
DATA*2
PORT C
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) × × × ×
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) × × × ×
Mass air flow sensor × × ×
D
Engine coolant temperature sensor × × × × ×

A/F sensor 1 × × × × × E
Heated oxygen sensor 2 × × × × ×
Vehicle speed sensor × × × ×
Accelerator pedal position sensor × × × F
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
Throttle position sensor × × ×

Fuel tank temperature sensor × × × ×
G
EVAP control system pressure
× × ×
sensor
Intake air temperature sensor × × × × H
INPUT
Knock sensor ×
Refrigerant pressure sensor × ×
Closed throttle position switch I
(accelerator pedal position sensor × ×
signal)
Air conditioner switch × × J
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch × × ×
Stop lamp switch × × ×
K
Power steering pressure sensor × × ×
Battery voltage × ×
Load signal × × L
Fuel level sensor × × ×
ASCD steering switch × × ×
ASCD brake switch × × ×
M
Injectors × × ×
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
Power transistor (Ignition timing) × × ×

Throttle control motor relay × × ×
Throttle control motor ×
EVAP canister purge volume con-
× × × × ×
trol solenoid valve
OUTPUT
Air conditioner relay × ×

Fuel pump relay × × × ×
Cooling fan relay × × × ×
A/F sensor 1 heater × × × ×
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater × × × ×
EVAP canister vent control valve × × × × ×
Calculated load value × × ×

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
X: Applicable
*1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs.
*2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-II screen in freeze frame data
mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-53, "FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME
DATA" .
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication.
2. Connect “CONSULT-II” and “CONSULT-II CONVERTER” to
data link connector, which is located under LH dash panel near
the center console.
BBIA0369E
4. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
BCIA0029E
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
If “ENGINE” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data
Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
BCIA0030E
6. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service

procedure.
For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation Manual.
BCIA0031E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WORK SUPPORT MODE

Work Item A
WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE ● FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START” DUR- When releasing fuel pressure
EC
ING IDLING. from fuel line
CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.
IDLE AIR VOL LEARN ● THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE When learning the idle air volume
WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN C
ECM.
SELF-LEARNING CONT ● THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL When clearing the coefficient of
MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEF- self-learning control value D
FICIENT.
EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE CLOSE THE EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE IN When detecting EVAP vapor leak
ORDER TO MAKE EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE UNDER THE point of EVAP system E
FOLLOWING CONDITIONS.
● IGN SW ON
● ENGINE NOT RUNNING
F
● AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IS ABOVE 0°C (32°F).
● NO VACUUM AND NO HIGH PRESSURE IN EVAP SYS-
TEM
● FUEL TANK TEMP. IS MORE THAN 0°C (32°F).
G
● WITHIN 10 MINUTES AFTER STARTING “EVAP SYS-
TEM CLOSE”
● WHEN TRYING TO EXECUTE “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” H
UNDER THE CONDITION EXCEPT ABOVE, CONSULT-
II WILL DISCONTINUE IT AND DISPLAY APPROPRI-
ATE INSTRUCTION.
I
NOTE:
WHEN STARTING ENGINE, CONSULT-II MAY DISPLAY
“BATTERY VOLTAGE IS LOW. CHARGE BATTERY”,
EVEN IN USING CHARGED BATTERY. J
TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ* ● IDLE CONDITION When setting target idle speed
TARGET IGN TIM ADJ* ● IDLE CONDITION When adjusting target ignition tim-
ing K
*: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE L

Self Diagnostic Item
Regarding items of DTC and 1st trip DTC, refer to EC-8, "INDEX FOR DTC" .)
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data M
Freeze frame data

Description
item*1
DIAG TROUBLE
● The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as “PXXXX”. (Refer
CODE
to EC-8, "INDEX FOR DTC" .)
[PXXXX]
FUEL SYS-B1 ● “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
● One mode in the following is displayed.
“Mode2”: Open loop due to detected system malfunction
FUEL SYS-B2 “Mode3”: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enleanment)
“Mode4”: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control
“Mode5”: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop
CAL/LD VALUE [%] ● The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
COOLANT TEMP
● The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[°C] or [°F]

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Freeze frame data

Description
item*1
L-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] ● “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
● The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule
L-FUEL TRM-B2 [%]
than short-term fuel trim.
S-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] ● “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
● The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel
S-FUEL TRM-B2 [%]
schedule.
ENGINE SPEED
● The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[rpm]
VEHICL SPEED
● The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[km/h] or [mph]
B/FUEL SCHDL
● The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[msec]
INT/A TEMP SE
● The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[°C] or [°F]
*1: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data.
DATA MONITOR MODE

Monitored Item
×: Applicable
ECM
MAIN
Monitored item INPUT
SIG- Description Remarks
[Unit] SIG-
NALS
NALS
● Accuracy becomes poor if engine speed
● Indicates the engine speed computed drops below the idle rpm.
from the signal of the crankshaft position
ENG SPEED [rpm] × × ● If the signal is interrupted while the engine
sensor (POS) and camshaft position
sensor (PHASE). is running, an abnormal value may be indi-
cated.
● The signal voltage of the mass air flow ● When the engine is stopped, a certain value
MAS A/F SE-B1 [V] × ×
sensor is displayed. is indicated.
● “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel
B/FUEL SCHDL injection pulse width programmed into
×
[msec] ECM, prior to any learned on board cor-
rection.
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] × ● When the engine is stopped, a certain value
● The mean value of the air-fuel ratio is indicated.
feedback correction factor per cycle is
A/F ALPHA-B2 [%] × indicated. ● This data also includes the data for the air-
fuel ratio learning control.
● The engine coolant temperature (deter- ● When the engine coolant temperature sen-
COOLAN TEMP/S mined by the signal voltage of the sor is open or short-circuited, ECM enters
× ×
[°C] or [°F] engine coolant temperature sensor) is fail-safe mode. The engine coolant temper-
displayed. ature determined by the ECM is displayed.
A/F SEN1 (B1) [V] × × ● The A/F signal computed from the input
A/F SEN1 (B2) [V] × signal of the A/F sensor 1 is displayed.
HO2S2 (B1) [V] × ● The signal voltage of the heated oxygen

HO2S2 (B2) [V] × sensor 2 is displayed.
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) ● Display of heated oxygen sensor 2 sig-

×
[RICH/LEAN] nal:
RICH... means the amount of oxygen
after three way catalyst is relatively ● When the engine is stopped, a certain value
HO2S2 MNTR (B2) small. is indicated.
× LEAN... means the amount of oxygen
[RICH/LEAN]
after three way catalyst is relatively
large.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ECM
MAIN
Monitored item INPUT A
[Unit] SIG-
NALS
NALS
● The vehicle speed computed from the EC
VHCL SPEED SE
× × vehicle speed signal sent from combina-
[km/h] or [mph]
tion meter is displayed.
BATTERY VOLT ● The power supply voltage of ECM is dis-
× × C
[V] played.
ACCEL SEN 1 [V] × ×
● The accelerator pedal position sensor ● Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is
signal voltage is displayed. D
ACCEL SEN 2 [V] × converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs
from ECM terminal voltage signal.
THRTL SEN 1 [V] × ×
E
● The throttle position sensor signal volt- ● Throttle position sensor 2 signal is con-
THRTL SEN 2 [V] × age is displayed. verted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs
from ECM terminal voltage signal.
● The fuel temperature (determined by the
F
FUEL T/TEMP SE
× signal voltage of the fuel tank tempera-
[°C] or [°F]
ture sensor) is displayed.
● The intake air temperature (determined G
INT/A TEMP SE
× × by the signal voltage of the intake air
[°C] or [°F]
temperature sensor) is indicated.
EVAP SYS PRES ● The signal voltage of EVAP control sys- H
×
[V] tem pressure sensor is displayed.
FUEL LEVEL SE ● The signal voltage of the fuel level sen-
×
[V] sor is displayed.
I
● Indicates start signal status [ON/OFF]
START SIGNAL computed by the ECM according to the ● After starting the engine, [OFF] is displayed
× ×
[ON/OFF] signals of engine speed and battery volt- regardless of the starter signal.
age. J
● Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] com-
CLSD THL POS
× × puted by ECM according to the acceler-
[ON/OFF]
ator pedal position sensor signal. K
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air
AIR COND SIG
× × conditioner switch as determined by the
[ON/OFF]
air conditioner signal. L
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
P/N POSI SW
× × park/neutral position (PNP) switch sig-
[ON/OFF]
nal.
M
● [ON/OFF] condition of the power steer-
PW/ST SIGNAL ing system (determined by the signal
× ×
[ON/OFF] voltage of the power steering pressure
sensor signal) is indicated.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
electrical load signal.
ON... Rear window defogger switch is
LOAD SIGNAL
× × ON and/or lighting switch is in 2nd posi-
[ON/OFF]
tion.
OFF... Both rear window defogger
switch and lighting switch are OFF.
IGNITION SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from igni-
[ON/OFF] tion switch signal.
HEATER FAN SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
[ON/OFF] heater fan switch signal.
BRAKE SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
[ON/OFF] stop lamp switch signal.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ECM
MAIN
[Unit] SIG-
NALS
NALS
INJ PULSE-B1
× ● Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse
[msec] ● When the engine is stopped, a certain com-
width compensated by ECM according
INJ PULSE-B2 puted value is indicated.
to the input signals.
[msec]
IGN TIMING ● Indicates the ignition timing computed ● When the engine is stopped, a certain value
×
[BTDC] by ECM according to the input signals. is indicated.
● “Calculated load value” indicates the
CAL/LD VALUE [%] value of the current air flow divided by
peak air flow.
● Indicates the mass air flow computed by
MASS AIRFLOW
ECM according to the signal voltage of
[g·m/s]
the mass air flow sensor.
● Indicates the EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve control value
PURG VOL C/V computed by the ECM according to the
[%] input signals.
● The opening becomes larger as the
value increases.
● The air conditioner relay control condi-
AIR COND RLY
× tion (determined by ECM according to
[ON/OFF]
the input signals) is indicated.
● Indicates the fuel pump relay control
FUEL PUMP RLY
× condition determined by ECM according
[ON/OFF]
● The control condition of the EVAP canis-
ter vent control valve (determined by
VENT CONT/V ECM according to the input signals) is
[ON/OFF] indicated.
ON... Closed
OFF... Open
● Indicates the throttle control motor relay
THRTL RELAY
control condition determined by the
[ON/OFF]
ECM according to the input signals.
● The control condition of the cooling fan
(determined by ECM according to the
COOLING FAN
input signals) is indicated.
[HI/OFF]
HI... High speed operation
OFF... Stop
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
[ON/OFF] ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated
oxygen sensor 2 heater determined by
HO2S2 HTR (B2) ECM according to the input signals.
[ON/OFF]
● Indicates the engine speed computed
I/P PULLY SPD
from the turbine revolution sensor sig-
[rpm]
nal.
VEHICLE SPEED ● Indicates the vehicle speed computed
[km/h] or [MPH] from the revolution sensor signal.
● Display the condition of idle air volume
learning
IDL A/V LEARN YET... Idle air volume learning has not
[YET/CMPLT] been performed yet.
CMPLT... Idle air volume learning has
already been performed successfully.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ECM
MAIN
Monitored item INPUT A
[Unit] SIG-
NALS
NALS
TRVL AFTER MIL EC
● Distance traveled while MIL is activated.
[km] or [mile]
A/F S1 HTR (B1) ● Indicates A/F sensor 1 heater control
[%] value computed by the ECM according
C
A/F S1 HTR (B2)
● The current flow to the heater becomes
[%]
larger as the value increases.
AC PRESS SEN ● The signal voltage from the refrigerant
D
[V] pressure sensor is displayed.
● The vehicle speed computed from the
VHCL SPEED SE E
vehicle speed signal sent from TCM is
[km/h] or [mph]
displayed.
SET VHCL SPD
● The preset vehicle speed is displayed.
[km/h] or [mph] F
MAIN SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ON/
[ON/OFF] OFF(MAIN) switch signal.
CANCEL SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from CAN- G
[ON/OFF] CEL switch signal.
RESUME/ACC SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from
[ON/OFF] ACCEL/RESUME switch signal. H
SET SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from
[ON/OFF] COAST/SET switch signal.
BRAKE SW1 SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from I
[ON/OFF] ASCD brake switch signal.
BRAKE SW2 SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of stop
[ON/OFF] lamp switch signal.
J
● Indicates the vehicle cruise condition.
NON... Vehicle speed is maintained at
the ASCD set speed.
VHCL SPD CUT K
CUT... Vehicle speed increased to
[NON/CUT]
excessively high compared with the
ASCD set speed, and ASCD operation
is cut off.
L
● Indicates the vehicle cruise condition.
NON... Vehicle speed is maintained at
the ASCD set speed.
LOW SPEED CUT M
CUT... Vehicle speed decreased to
[NON/CUT]
excessively low compared with the
ASCD set speed, and ASCD operation
is cut off.
AT OD MONITOR ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D
[ON/OFF] according to the input signal from TCM.
AT OD CANCEL ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D
[ON/OFF] cancel signal from TCM.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of
CRUISE LAMP
CRUISE lamp determined by the ECM
[ON/OFF]
according to the input signals.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of SET
SET LAMP
lamp determined by the ECM according
[ON/OFF]

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ECM
MAIN
[Unit] SIG-
NALS
NALS
Voltage [V]
Frequency [msec],
● Only “#” is displayed if item is unable to be
[Hz] or [%]
measured.
DUTY-HI ● Voltage, frequency, duty cycle or pulse
width measured by the probe. ● Figures with “#”s are temporary ones. They
DUTY-LOW are the same figures as an actual piece of
data which was just previously measured.
PLS WIDTH-HI
PLS WIDTH-LOW
NOTE:
● Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE

Monitored Item
ECM
MAIN
INPUT
Monitored item [Unit] SIG- Description Remarks
SIG-
NALS
NALS
● Indicates the engine speed computed
ENG SPEED [rpm] × × from the signal of the crankshaft position
sensor (POS).
● The signal voltage of the mass air flow ● When engine is running specification
MAS A/F SE-B1 [V] × ×
sensor specification is displayed. range is indicated.
● “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel
B/FUEL SCHDL injection pulse width programmed into ● When engine is running specification
×
[msec] ECM, prior to any learned on board cor- range is indicated.
rection.
● When engine is running specification
● The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feed- range is indicated.
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%]
× back correction factor per cycle is indi-
A/F ALPHA-B2 [%] ● This data also includes the data for the
cated.
air-fuel ratio learning control.
NOTE:
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
ACTIVE TEST MODE

Test Item
TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGEMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)
● Engine: Return to the original ● Harness and connectors
FUEL INJEC- trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
● Fuel injectors
TION ● Change the amount of fuel injec- CHECK ITEM.
tion using CONSULT-II. ● Heated oxygen sensor 1
● Engine: Return to the original

trouble condition
IGNITION TIM- If trouble symptom disappears, see
● Timing light: Set ● Perform Idle Air Volume Learning.
ING CHECK ITEM.
● Retard the ignition timing using
CONSULT-II.
● Engine: After warming up, idle ● Harness and connectors

the engine. ● Compression
POWER BAL- ● A/C switch OFF ● Fuel injectors
Engine runs rough or dies.
ANCE ● Shift lever N ● Power transistor
● Cut off each injector signal one at ● Spark plugs
a time using CONSULT-II. ● Ignition coils

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGEMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)

A
● Ignition switch: ON ● Harness and connectors
COOLING FAN* ● Turn the cooling fan “ON” and Cooling fan moves and stops. ● Cooling fan motor
“OFF” using CONSULT-II. ● IPDM E/R
EC
● Engine: Return to the original ● Harness and connectors
ENG COOLANT trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see ● Engine coolant temperature sen-
TEMP ● Change the engine coolant tem- CHECK ITEM. sor
perature using CONSULT-II.
C
● Fuel injectors
● Ignition switch: ON (Engine
stopped)
FUEL PUMP Fuel pump relay makes the operat- ● Harness and connectors D
RELAY ● Turn the fuel pump relay ON and ing sound. ● Fuel pump relay
OFF using CONSULT-II and lis-
ten to operating sound.
● Engine: After warming up, run E
engine at 1,500 rpm.
PURG VOL ● Change the EVAP canister purge Engine speed changes according to ● Harness and connectors
CONT/V volume control solenoid valve the opening percent. ● Solenoid valve F
opening percent using CON-
SULT-II.
FUEL/T TEMP
SEN
● Change the fuel tank temperature using CONSULT-II. G
● Ignition switch: ON (Engine
stopped)
VENT CON- Solenoid valve makes an operating ● Harness and connectors H
TROL/V ● Turn solenoid valve ON and OFF sound. ● Solenoid valve
with the CONSULT-II and listen
to operating sound.
*: Leaving cooling fan OFF with CONSULT-II while engine is running may cause the engine to overheat. I
DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE

SRT STATUS Mode J
For details, refer to EC-54, "SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE" .
SRT Work Support Mode
This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT while monitoring the SRT status. K
DTC Work Support Mode

Test mode Test item Condition Reference page L
PURGE FLOW P0441 EC-269
EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442* EC-274
EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM M
EVAP V/S SML LEAK P0456/P1456* EC-322
PURG VOL CN/V P1444 EC-494
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276 EC-461
A/F SEN1 (B2) P1286 EC-461
A/F SEN1
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1278/P1279 Refer to corresponding EC-470, EC-482
A/F SEN1 (B2) P1288/1289 trouble diagnosis for DTC. EC-470, EC-482
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 EC-194
HO2S2 (B1) P1146 EC-381
HO2S2 (B1) P1147 EC-393
H02S2
HO2S2 (B2) P0159 EC-194
HO2S2 (B2) P1166 EC-381
HO2S2 (B2) P1167 EC-393
*: DTC P1442 and P1456 does not apply to A60 models but appears in DTC Work Support Mode screens.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE (RECORDING VEHICLE DATA)

Description
CONSULT-II has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by touching “SETTING” in “DATA MONITOR”
mode.
1. “AUTO TRIG” (Automatic trigger):
● The malfunction will be identified on the CONSULT-II screen
in real time.
In other words, DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will be
displayed if the malfunction is detected by ECM.
At the moment a malfunction is detected by ECM, “MONI-
TOR” in “DATA MONITOR” screen is changed to “Recording
Data... xx%” as shown at right, and the data after the malfunc-
tion detection is recorded. Then when the percentage
reached 100%, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is displayed. If
“STOP” is touched on the screen during “Recording Data... SEF705Y
xx%”, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is also displayed.
The recording time after the malfunction detection and the
recording speed can be changed by “TRIGGER POINT” and
“Recording Speed”. Refer to CONSULT-II OPERATION MAN-
UAL.
2. “MANU TRIG” (Manual trigger):
● DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will not be displayed
automatically on CONSULT-II screen even though a malfunc-
tion is detected by ECM.
DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though
a malfunction is detected.
SEF707X

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Operation
1. “AUTO TRIG” A
● While trying to detect the DTC/1st trip DTC by performing the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, be sure
to select to “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. You can confirm the malfunction at the moment it is
detected. EC
● While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT-II should be set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO
TRIG)” mode, especially in case the incident is intermittent.
When you are inspecting the circuit by gently shaking (or twisting) the suspicious connectors, compo- C
nents and harness in the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, the moment a malfunction is found the DTC/
1st trip DTC will be displayed. (Refer to “INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS” in GI-27, "How to Perform
Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .)
D
2. “MANU TRIG”
● If the malfunction is displayed as soon as “DATA MONITOR” is selected, reset CONSULT-II to “MANU
TRIG”. By selecting “MANU TRIG” you can monitor and store the data. The data can be utilized for fur-
ther diagnosis, such as a comparison with the value for the normal operating condition. E
M
PBIB0197E
Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function UBS00CGG
DESCRIPTION
Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with SAE J1978 has
8 different functions explained below.
ISO9141 is used as the protocol.
The name “GST” or “Generic Scan Tool” is used in this service man-
ual.
SEF139P

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode Function
This mode gains access to current emission-related data values, including analog inputs
MODE 1 READINESS TESTS
and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information.
This mode gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by ECM during
MODE 2 (FREEZE DATA) the freeze frame. For details, refer to EC-53, "FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP
FREEZE FRAME DATA" .
This mode gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which were stored
MODE 3 DTCs
by ECM.
This mode can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This includes:
● Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (MODE 1)
● Clear diagnostic trouble codes (MODE 3)
MODE 4 CLEAR DIAG INFO ● Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (MODE 1)
● Clear freeze frame data (MODE 2)
● Reset status of system monitoring test (MODE 1)
● Clear on board monitoring test results (MODE 6 and 7)
This mode accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of specific com-
MODE 6 (ON BOARD TESTS)
ponents/systems that are not continuously monitored.
This mode enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emission-related pow-
MODE 7 (ON BOARD TESTS) ertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal driving condi-
tions.
This mode can close EVAP system in ignition switch ON position (Engine stopped). When
this mode is performed, the following parts can be opened or closed.
● EVAP canister vent control valve open
In the following conditions, this mode cannot function.
● Low ambient temperature
MODE 8 —
● Low battery voltage
● Engine running
● Ignition switch OFF
● Low fuel temperature
● Too much pressure is applied to EVAP system
This mode enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle information such
MODE 9 (CALIBRATION ID)
as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs.
2. Connect GST to data link connector, which is located under LH
dash panel near the center console.
BBIA0369E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

4. Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in A
the operation manual.
(*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are
shown.) EC
SEF398S
D
5. Perform each diagnostic mode according to each service proce-
dure.
For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of
E
the tool maker.
G
SEF416S

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor UBS00CGH
Remarks:
● Specification data are reference values.
● Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.
* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.
i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data in
spite of the ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM
according to the signals input from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Run engine and compare the CONSULT-II value with tachometer indica- Almost the same speed as the
ENG SPEED
tion. tachometer indication.
● Engine: After warming up Idle Approx. 1.1 - 1.4V
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
MAS A/F SE-B1
● Shift lever: N 2,500 rpm Approx. 1.7 - 2.0V
● no load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 3.0 - 4.2 msec
B/FUEL SCHDL
● Shift lever: N 2,000 rpm 3.0 - 4.2 msec
● no load
A/F ALPHA-B1 Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
● Engine: After warming up 54% - 155%
A/F ALPHA-B2 rpm
COOLAN TEMP/S ● Engine: After warming up More than 70°C (158°F)
A/F SEN1 (B1) Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
● Engine: After warming up Fluctuated around 1.5V
A/F SEN1 (B2) rpm
HO2S2 (B1) ● After keeping engine speed Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
HO2S2 (B2) between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for quickly. 1.0V
1 minute and at idle for 1 minute
under no load.
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) ● After keeping engine speed Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for LEAN ←→ RICH
HO2S2 MNTR (B2) quickly.
1 minute and at idle for 1 minute
under no load.
● Turn drive wheels and compare the CONSULT-II value with speedometer Almost the same speed as the
VEH SPEED SE
indication. speedometer indication
BATTERY VOLT ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14V
● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V

ACCEL SEN1
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.0 - 4.7V

ACCEL SEN2*
● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V
THRTL SEN1 (Engine stopped)
THRTL SEN2* Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
● Shift lever: D
EVAP SYS PRES ● Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V
START SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON → START → ON OFF → ON → OFF
● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON

CLSD THL POS
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF
● Engine: After warming up, idle
AIR COND SIG Air conditioner switch: ON
the engine ON
Shift lever: P or N ON
P/N POSI SW ● Ignition switch: ON
Shift lever: Except above OFF

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

A
Steering wheel is in neutral position.
● Engine: After warming up, idle OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL (Forward direction)
the engine
Steering wheel is turned. ON
EC
Rear window defogger switch is ON
ON
and/or lighting switch is in 2nd.
LOAD SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON
Rear window defogger switch is OFF
OFF C
and lighting switch is OFF.
IGNITION SW ● Ignition switch: ON → OFF → ON ON → OFF → ON
Engine: After warming up, idle Heater fan is operating. ON

HEATER FAN SW
● D
the engine Heater fan is not operating OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released OFF
BRAKE SW ● Ignition switch: ON
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON E
INJ PULSE-B1 ● Air conditioner switch: OFF
INJ PULSE-B2 Shift lever: N
F
● 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec
● no load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 14° - 18° BTDC
G
IGN TIMING
● Shift lever: N 2,000 rpm 25° - 45° BTDC
● no load
H
● Engine: After warming up Idle 14% - 33%
CAL/LD VALUE
● Shift lever: N 2,500 rpm 12% - 25% I
● no load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 3.0 - 9.0 g·m/s
● Air conditioner switch: OFF J
MASS AIRFLOW
● Shift lever: N 2,500 rpm 9.0 - 28.0 g·m/s
● no load
● Engine: After warming up Idle K
● Air conditioner switch: OFF (Accelerator pedal is not depressed 0%
PURG VOL C/V even slightly, after starting engine)
● Shift lever: N
● no load 2,000 rpm — L
Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF
● Engine: After warming up, idle
AIR COND RLY Air conditioner switch: ON
the engine ON M
(Compressor operates)
● For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON
ON
FUEL PUMP RLY ● Engine running or cranking
● Except above conditions OFF
VENT CONT/V ● Ignition switch: ON OFF
THRTL RELAY ● Ignition switch: ON ON
Engine coolant temperature is 99°C
OFF
(210°F) or less
● Engine: After warming up, idle Engine coolant temperature is

the engine between 100°C (212°F) and 104°C
COOLING FAN ON
(219°F) at vehicle speed less than 40
● Air conditioner switch: OFF km/h (25 MPH)
ON
(221°F) or more

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
– Engine: After warming up
HO2S2 HTR (B1) ON
– Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
at idle for 1 minute under no load
● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF
Almost the same speed as the
I/P PULLY SPD ● Vehicle speed: More than 20 km/h (12 MPH)
tachometer indication
VEHICLE SPEED
Vehicle has traveled after MIL has 0 - 65,535 km
TRVL AFTER MIL ● Ignition switch: ON
turned ON. (0 - 40,723 miles)
● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Approx. 0V
AC PRESS SEN ● Engine: Idle
1.0 - 4.0V
VEH SPEED SE
The preset vehicle speed is
SET VHCL SPD ● Engine: Running ASCD: Operating.
displayed.
ON/OFF(MAIN) switch: Pressed ON
MAIN SW ● Ignition switch: ON
ON/OFF(MAIN) switch: Released OFF
CANCEL switch: Pressed ON
CANCEL SW ● Ignition switch: ON
CANCEL switch: Released OFF
ACCEL/RESUME switch: Pressed ON
RESUME/ACC SW ● Ignition switch: ON
ACCEL/RESUME switch: Released OFF
COAST/SET switch: Pressed ON
SET SW ● Ignition switch: ON
COAST/SET switch: Released OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released ON
BRAKE SW1 ● Ignition switch: ON
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
BRAKE SW2 ● Ignition switch: ON
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
ON/OFF(MAIN) switch: Pressed at the
CRUISE LAMP ● Ignition switch: ON ON → OFF
1st time → at the 2nd time
● CRUISE switch: ON COAST/SET switch: Pressed ON
SET LAMP ● When vehicle switch is between

40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h COAST/SET switch: Released OFF
(89 MPH).
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ from
ECM terminals voltage signal.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CGI
A
The following are the major sensor reference graphs in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
CLSD THL POS, ACCEL SEN 1, THRTL SEN 1
Below is the data for “CLSD THL POS”, “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” when depressing the accelera- EC
tor pedal with the ignition switch ON and with selector lever in D position.
The signal of “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” should rise gradually without any intermittent drop or rise
after “CLSD THL POS” is changed from “ON” to “OFF”.
C
F
PBIB0198E
ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S2 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1
Below is the data for “ENG SPEED”, “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “THRTL SEN 1”, “HO2S2 (B1)”, and “INJ PULSE-B1” G
when revving engine quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up engine sufficiently.
Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary.
H
SEF241Y

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
PBIB1594E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE PFP:00031

A
Description UBS00CGJ
The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)”
mode of CONSULT-II during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “DATA MONI- EC
TOR (SPEC)” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the value in
“DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have one or
more malfunctions.
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the C
MIL.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items:
● B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board cor- D
rection)
● A/F ALPHA-B1/B2 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)
● MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor) E
Testing Condition UBS00CGK
● Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,017 miles) F

2
● Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm , 14.25 - 15.12 psi)
● Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
G
● Engine coolant temperature: 75 - 95°C (167 - 203°F)
● Transmission: Warmed-up*1
● Electrical load: Not applied*2 H
● Engine speed: Idle
*1: After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” (A/T
fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates more than 60°C (140°F). I
*2: Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are OFF. Steering wheel is straight
ahead.
J
Inspection Procedure UBS00CGL
NOTE:
Perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode in maximum scale display.
K
1. Perform EC-78, "Basic Inspection" .
2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met.
3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” L
and “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with
CONSULT-II.
4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value. M
5. If NG, go to EC-122, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF601Z

Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CGM
SEF613ZD

EC
SEF768Z

SEF615ZA

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT PFP:00006

A
Description UBS00CGN
Intermittent incidents (I/I) may occur. In many cases, the malfunction resolves itself (the part or circuit function
returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer's EC
complaint often do not recur on (1st trip) DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of I/I occur-
rences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident occurred may
not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may not indicate the
specific malfunctioning area. C
Common I/I Report Situations

STEP in Work Flow Situation D
II The CONSULT-II is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than [0] or [1t].
III The symptom described by the customer does not recur.
E
IV (1st trip) DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
VI The Diagnostic Procedure for PXXXX does not indicate the malfunctioning area.
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CGO F

1. INSPECTION START
Erase (1st trip) DTCs. Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMA- G
TION" .
>> GO TO 2. H
2. CHECK GROUND TERMINALS

I
Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection.
Refer to GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , “CIRCUIT INSPECTION”,
“Ground Inspection”.
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace.
K
3. SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Perform GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , “INCIDENT SIMULATION L
TESTS”.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. M
4. CHECK CONNECTOR TERMINALS

Refer to GI-24, "How to Check Terminal" , “HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS”, “How to Check Enlarged Con-
tact Spring of Terminal”.
OK or NG
NG >> Repair or replace connector.

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT PFP:24110
Wiring Diagram UBS00CV7
BBWA1155E

CAUTION: A
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] C
1 B ECM ground Body ground
● Idle speed
[Ignition switch: OFF] 0V
109 B/R Ignition switch BATTERY VOLTAGE D
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF] E
0 - 1.5V
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
[Ignition switch: OFF] F
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
115 B/R [Engine is running] G

ECM ground Body ground
116 B/W ● Idle speed
120 BR (11 - 14V) H
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CV8
1. INSPECTION START I
Start engine.
Is engine running?
J
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 9.
No >> GO TO 2.
K
2. CHECK 10A FUSE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. L
2. Check 10A fuse (No. 59, located in fuse and relay box).
OK or NG
OK >> Reinstall fuse. GO TO 3. M
NG >> ● Repair harness or connectors
● Replace 10A fuse.
3. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 109 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
MBIB0015E


● Harness connectors M31, E152
● Harness for open or short between ECM and ignition switch
>> Repair harness or connectors.
5. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
BBIA0354E
Refer to EC-131, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
6. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and body ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

● Harness connectors F32, E2
● Harness for open or short between ECM and body ground
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

8. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II A

1. Reconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 4 and ground with EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> Go to EC-561, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .
NG >> GO TO 9. D
E
PBIB2063E
9. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

F
2. Turn ignition switch ON and then OFF.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground G
with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: After turning ignition switch OFF, battery
voltage will exist for a few seconds, then H
drop approximately 0V.
OK or NG
I
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG (Battery voltage does not exist.)>>GO TO 10.
NG (Battery voltage exists for more than a few seconds.)>>GO TO
17. PBIB1630E J
10. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV

K
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. M
NG >> GO TO 12.
PBIB1191E

11. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V

2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E119.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 119, 120 and IPDM E/R terminal 3.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
12. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VI

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 111 and IPDM E/R terminal 7.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
13. CHECK 20A FUSE

Check 20A fuse (No. 53, located in IPDM E/R).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> Replace 20A fuse.

BBIA0354E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.

15. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II A

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC

3. Also check harness for short to power. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> GO TO 16. D

Check the following. E
● Harness for open or short between ECM and ground
F
17. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT G
Refer to EC-125, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

OK or NG H
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
I
Ground Inspection UBS00CV9
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground
connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can J
become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drasti-
cally affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even
when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. K
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
● Remove the ground bolt or screw.
● Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. L
● Clean as required to assure good contact.
● Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
M
● Inspect for “add-on” accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
● If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the
wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one
eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.

For detailed ground distribution information, refer to “Ground Distribution” in PG section.
PBIB1870E

DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE PFP:23710

A
Description UBS00CGR
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec- EC
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. C
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CGS
D
Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detecting condition Possible cause
name
U1000*1 ● ECM cannot communicate to other control E

1000*1 units. ● Harness or connectors
CAN communication
(CAN communication line is open or
line ECM cannot communicate for more than the
U1001*2 ●
shorted)
specified time.
1001*2 F
*1: This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
*2: The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
G
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CGT

2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. H
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-135, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Wiring Diagram UBS00CGU
BBWA0873E

Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CGV
A
Go to LAN-3, "Precautions When Using CONSULT-II" .
EC

DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER PFP:226A0
Description UBS00CGW
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Engine speed
Heated oxygen sensor 2
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature heater control
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed,
amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.
OPERATION
Engine speed rpm Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
Above 3,600 OFF
Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
● Engine: After warming up
ON
● Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1
minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CGX
Specification data are reference values.

● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
– Engine: After warming up
HO2S2 HTR (B1) ON
– Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
at idle for 1 minute under no load
● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CGY
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0037
0037 The current amperage in the heated oxygen sen- ● Harness or connectors
(Bank 1) Heated oxygen sensor 2 sor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
P0057 heater control circuit low (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM circuit is open or shorted.)
0057 through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.) ● Heater oxygen sensor 2 heater
(Bank 2)
P0038
0038 The current amperage in the heated oxygen sen- ● Harness or connectors
(Bank 1) sor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
Heated oxygen sensor 2
(An excessively high voltage signal is sent to circuit is shorted.)
P0058 heater control circuit high
ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 2
0058 heater.) ● Heater oxygen sensor 2 heater
(Bank 2)

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CGZ
A
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION: EC
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at
idle.
WITH CONSULT-II C
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-
ture. D
4. Start the engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 rpm
and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. E
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-141, "Diagnostic Procedure"
. F
SEF174Y
G
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
H

Wiring Diagram UBS00CH0
BANK 1
BBWA1156E

CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
– Engine: after warming up 0 - 1.0V
D
6 GR
E
F

BANK 2
BBWA1157E

CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
– Engine: after warming up 0 - 1.0V
D
25 O/G
E
F
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CH1
1. CHECK HO2S2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT G

2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. H
K
BBIA0435E
3. Turn ignition switch ON. L

4. Check voltage between HO2S2 terminal 3 and ground with
Voltage: Battery voltage M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB0112E


● Harness connectors E5, F14
● IPDM E/R connector E119
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and fuse
3. CHECK HO2S2 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.
Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0037, P0038 6 2 1
P0057, P0058 25 2 2

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER

Refer to EC-143, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00CH2
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER A

1. Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as follows.
Terminal No. Resistance
EC
2 and 3 5.0 - 7.0 Ω at 25°C (77°F)
1 and 2, 3, 4 ∞Ω
4 and 1, 2, 3 (Continuity should not exist) C
2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped D
from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard sur-
face such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system E
threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-
18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
F
SEF249Y
H
Removal and Installation UBS00CH3
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

Refer to EM-19, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . I

DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR PFP:22680
Component Description UBS00CH4
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It mea-
sures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake
flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot
wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is
reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater
the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to the hot wire is changed to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The
ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
BBIA0355E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CH5

MAS A/F SE-B1
● No load
CAL/LD VALUE
● Shift lever: N 2,500 rpm 12% - 25%
● No load
MASS AIRFLOW
● No load
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CH6
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

● Harness or connectors
A high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM (The sensor circuit is open or
A) shorted.)
under light load driving condition.
● Mass air flow sensor
P0101 Mass air flow sensor circuit
0101 range/performance problem
(The sensor circuit is open or
A low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM shorted.)
B)
under heavy load driving condition.
● Intake air leaks

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CH7
A
Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first.
If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at EC
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A C
NOTE:
If engine will not start or stops soon, wait at least 10 seconds with engine stopped (Ignition switch ON) instead
of running engine at idle speed.
D
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. E
4. Run engine for at least 10 seconds at idle speed.
5. If DTC is detected, go to EC-148, "Diagnostic Procedure" . F
SEF174Y H
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
I
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. J
With CONSULT-II
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. K
If engine cannot be started, go to EC-148, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
3. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
L
4. Check the voltage of “MAS A/F SE-B1” with “DATA MONITOR”.
5. Increases engine speed to about 4,000 rpm.
6. Monitor the linear voltage rise in response to engine speed
M
increases.
If NG, go to EC-148, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If OK, go to following step.
SEF243Y

7. Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive sec-

onds.
ENG SPEED More than 2,000 rpm
THRTL SEN 1 More than 3V
THRTL SEN 2 More than 3V
Selector lever Suitable position
Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load) will help
Driving location
maintain the driving conditions required for this test.
8. If DTC is detected, go to EC-148, "Diagnostic Procedure" . PBIB0199E
Overall Function Check UBS00CH8

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the mass air flow sensor circuit. During this check, a DTC
might not be confirmed.
With GST
2. Select MODE 1 with GST.
3. Check the mass air flow sensor signal with MODE 1.
4. Check for linear mass air flow sensor signal value rise in
response to increases to about 4,000 rpm in engine speed.
SEF534P

Wiring Diagram UBS00CH9
EC
BBWA1160E

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
[Engine is running]
67 R Sensor ground ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
120 BR (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CHA
1. INSPECTION START
Which malfunction (A or B) is duplicated?
A or B
A >> GO TO 3.
B >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM

Check the following for connection.
● Air duct
● Vacuum hoses
● Intake air passage between air duct to intake manifold
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Reconnect the parts.

3. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS A

EC
BBIA0354E
E
OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT G
1. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector.

2. Turn ignition switch ON. H
BBIA0368E
K
3. Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 2 and ground with
Voltage: Battery voltage L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5. M
PBIB1168E

● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and mass air flow sensor
● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM

6. CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00CHB
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR A

1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor EC
signal) and ground.
Condition Voltage V C
Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal
1.1 - 1.4
operating temperature.) D
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to
1.7 - 2.0
normal operating temperature.)
Idle to about 4,000 rpm* 1.1 - 1.4 to Approx. 4.0 E
PBIB1106E
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about
4,000 rpm.
4. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. F
● Turn ignition switch OFF.
● Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again.
● Perform steps 2 and 3 again.

G
5. If NG, remove mass air flow sensor from air duct. Check hot wire for damage or dust.
6. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. H
Removal and Installation UBS00CHC
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" . I

DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR PFP:22680
Component Description UBS00CHD
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It mea-
sures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake
flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot
wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is
reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater
the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to the hot wire is changed to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The
ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
BBIA0355E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CHE

MAS A/F SE-B1
● No load
CAL/LD VALUE
● Shift lever: N 2,500 rpm 12% - 25%
● No load
MASS AIRFLOW
● No load
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CHF
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.

P0102 Mass air flow sensor circuit An excessively low voltage from the sensor is (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0102 low input sent to ECM. ● Intake air leaks
P0103 Mass air flow sensor circuit An excessively high voltage from the sensor is (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0103 high input sent to ECM.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CHG
A
NOTE:
EC
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. C
3. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-155, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D
F
SEF058Y
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. G

With CONSULT-II H
3. Wait at least 5 seconds. I
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-155, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC is not detected, go to next step.
5. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds. J
SEF058Y
L
With GST
M

Wiring Diagram UBS00CHH
BBWA1160E

CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
● Idle speed
[Engine is running] D
● Idle speed
F
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
ECM relay switch OFF G
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF H
120 BR (11 - 14V)
I
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CHI
1. INSPECTION START
J
Which malfunction (P0102 or P0103) is duplicated?
P0102 or P0103
P0102 >> GO TO 2. K
P0103 >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM

L
Check the following for connection.
● Air duct
● Vacuum hoses M
● Intake air passage between air duct to intake manifold
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Reconnect the parts.

3. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

BBIA0354E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector.
BBIA0368E
3. Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 2 and ground with

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB1168E

● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and mass air flow sensor
● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM

6. CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

3. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67. EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. D
7. CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT E
F
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 8.
H
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
J
Refer to EC-125, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . K
>> INSPECTION END

L

Component Inspection UBS00CHJ

3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor
signal) and ground.
Condition Voltage V
Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal
1.1 - 1.4
operating temperature.)
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to
1.7 - 2.0
normal operating temperature.)
Idle to about 4,000 rpm* 1.1 - 1.4 to Approx. 4.0
PBIB1106E
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about
4,000 rpm.
4. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
● Turn ignition switch OFF.
● Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again.
● Perform steps 2 and 3 again.
5. If NG, remove mass air flow sensor from air duct. Check hot wire for damage or dust.
6. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
Removal and Installation UBS00CHK

Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .

DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR PFP:22630

A
Component Description UBS00CHL
The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor.
The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to EC
the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise. C
BBIA0355E
E
<Reference data>
Intake air temperature
Voltage* V Resistance kΩ F
°C (°F)
25 (77) 3.32 1.9 - 2.1
80 (176) 1.23 0.31 - 0.37 G
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 34
(Intake air temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION: H
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output SEF012P
voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor.
Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. I
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CHM
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause J
P0112 Intake air temperature An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
0112 sensor circuit low input sent to ECM.
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P0113 Intake air temperature An excessively high voltage from the sensor is ● Intake air temperature sensor K
0113 sensor circuit high input sent to ECM.
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CHN

L
NOTE:
M
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Wait at least 5 seconds.
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST

Wiring Diagram UBS00CHO
BBWA0879E

Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CHP
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS A

2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. EC
E
BBIA0354E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
G
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (intake air temperature sensor H
is built-into) harness connector.
I
BBIA0368E K
3. Check voltage between mass air flow sensor terminal 5 and

ground.
L
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. M
NG >> Repair harness or connectors.
PBIB1169E

3. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between mass air flow sensor terminal 6 and ECM terminal 67.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00CHQ
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Check resistance between mass air flow sensor terminals 5 and
6 under the following conditions.
Intake air temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
25 (77) 1.9 - 2.1
2. If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature
sensor).
BBIA0355E
SEF012P
Removal and Installation UBS00CHR


DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR PFP:22630

A
Component Description UBS00CHS
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine

coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the EC
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the ther-
mistor decreases as temperature increases. C
SEF594K
E
<Reference data>
Engine coolant temperature
°C (°F)
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00 G
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
(Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground. H
CAUTION: SEF012P
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output

voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM termi- I
nals, such as the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CHT
J
DTC
Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause
No. K
P0117 Engine coolant temperature An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
P0118 Engine coolant temperature An excessively high voltage from the sensor is ● Engine coolant temperature sensor L
FAIL-SAFE MODE M
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch ON
or START.
CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Engine coolant temperature decided
Condition
(CONSULT-II display)
Engine coolant temper- Just as ignition switch is turned ON or Start 40°C (104°F)
ature sensor circuit More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or
80°C (176°F)
Start
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
Except as shown above
(Depends on the time)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates
while engine is running.

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CHU
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST

Wiring Diagram UBS00CHV
EC
BBWA1161E

Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CHW

BBIA0354E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK ECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor harness connector.
BBIA0370E

3. Check voltage between ECT sensor terminal 1 and ground with
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0080E
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING RART

● Harness connector F26, F101
● Harness for open or short between ECM and engine coolant temperature sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

3. Check harness continuity between ECT sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 67. EC
C
4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. D
NG >> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART E

● Harness connector F26, F101
F
● Harness for open and short between ECT sensor and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G
6. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-167, "Component Inspection" . H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. I

J
>> INSPECTION END K

Component Inspection UBS00CHX
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor L
terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
PBIB0081E

<Reference data>
Engine coolant
Voltage* V Resistance kΩ
temperature °C (°F)
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal
73 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. SEF012P
Removal and Installation UBS00CHY

Refer to EM-59, "CYLINDER HEAD" .

DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR PFP:16119

A
Component Description UBS00CHZ
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,

throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to EC
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addi- C
tion, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig- D
nals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condi-
PBIB0145E
tion.
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CI0

F
THRTL SEN2* Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V G
● Shift lever: D
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CI1

H

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause I
P0122 Throttle position sensor An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor ● Harness or connectors
0122 2 circuit low input 2 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.)
(APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.) J
P0123 Throttle position sensor An excessively high voltage from the TP sen- ● Electric throttle control actuator
0123 2 circuit high input sor 2 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 2)
K
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. L
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees. M
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CI2
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
SEF058Y
WITH GST

Wiring Diagram UBS00CI3
EC
BBWA1167E

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
● Shift lever: D
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Shift lever: D
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Shift lever: D
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
● Shift lever: D
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CI4

BBIA0354E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I A

1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
EC
D
PBIB1480E
3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal E

2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
G
PBIB2065E H
3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. I
3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 2 and ECM terminal 47.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. J

OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace open circuit.
L
M
● Harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram
47 Electric throttle control actuator terminal 2 EC-171
91 APP sensor terminal 7 EC-542
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 6.

6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY

1. Replace the accelerator pedal assembly.
4. Perform EC-43, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 3.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
9. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.
10. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00CI5
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR A

3. Turn ignition switch ON EC
4. Set selector lever to D position.
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1signal),
69 (TP sensor 2signal) and engine ground under the following C
conditions.
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage D
50 Fully released More than 0.36V
(Throttle position sensor 1) Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
Fully released Less than 4.75V E
69
(Throttle position sensor 2) Fully depressed More than 0.36V
6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next PBIB1530E
F
step.
8. Perform EC-43, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . G
Removal and Installation UBS00CI6
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

Refer to EM-15, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . H

DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR PFP:22630
Component Description UBS00CI7
NOTE:
If DTC P0125 is displayed with P0117 or P0118, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0117 or
P0118. Refer to EC-163, "DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR" .
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine
coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the ther-
mistor decreases as temperature increases.
SEF594K
<Reference data>
Engine coolant
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
(Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION: SEF012P

voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM termi-
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CI8

● Voltage sent to ECM from the sensor is not ● Harness or connectors
Insufficient engine coolant practical, even when some time has passed (High resistance in the circuit)
P0125 after starting the engine.
temperature for closed loop
0125 ● Engine coolant temperature sensor
fuel control ● Engine coolant temperature is insufficient for
closed loop fuel control. ● Thermostat

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CI9
A
CAUTION:
Be careful not to overheat engine.
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II C
3. Check that “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 10°C (50°F). D
If it is above 10°C (50°F), the test result will be OK.
If it is below 10°C (50°F), go to following step.
4. Start engine and run it for 65 minutes at idle speed. E
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” increases to more than 10°C (50°F)
within 65 minutes, stop engine because the test result will
be OK.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-177, "Diagnostic Procedure" F
.
SEF174Y
H
WITH GST
I
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CIA

J
K
BBIA0354E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.

3. CHECK THERMOSTAT OPERATION

When the engine is cold [lower than 70°C (158°F)] condition, grasp lower radiator hose and confirm the engine
coolant does not flow.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace thermostat. Refer to CO-17, "THERMOSTAT AND WATER PIPING" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00CIB

1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
PBIB2064E
<Reference data>
Engine coolant
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal
73 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. SEF012P
Removal and Installation UBS00CIC

Refer to EM-59, "CYLINDER HEAD" .

DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR
DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR PFP:22630

A
Component Description UBS00CID
The intake air temperature sensor is built into mass air flow sensor.
The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to EC
the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise. C
BBIA0355E
E
<Reference data>
Intake air temperature
°C (°F)
–10 (14) 4.43 7.9 - 9.3
25 (77) 3.32 1.9 - 2.1 G
80 (176) 1.23 0.31 - 0.37
(Intake air temperature sensor) and ground. H
CAUTION: SEF012P

voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM termi- I
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CIE
J
Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is ● Harness or connectors

P0127 Intake air temperature (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) K
sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signal
0127 too high
from engine coolant temperature sensor. ● Intake air temperature sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CIF L

NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. M
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
TESTING CONDITION:
This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road
test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Wait until engine coolant temperature is less than 90°C (194°F)
a. Turn ignition switch ON.

b. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

c. Check the engine coolant temperature.
d. If the engine coolant temperature is not less than 90°C (194°F),
turn ignition switch OFF and cool down engine.
● Perform the following steps before engine coolant tempera-
ture is above 90°C (194°F).
4. Start engine.
5. Hold vehicle speed at more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 100 con- SEF189Y
secutive seconds.
WITH GST
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CIG

BBIA0354E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00CIH
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR A

1. Check resistance between intake air temperature sensor termi-
nals 5 and 6 under the following conditions.
EC
Intake air temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
25 (77) 1.9 - 2.1
2. If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature C
sensor).
D
BBIA0355E
SEF012P
H
Removal and Installation UBS00CII
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR I


DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION
DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION PFP:21200
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CIJ
Engine coolant temperature has not risen enough to open the thermostat even though the engine has run long
enough.
This is due to a leak in the seal or the thermostat stuck open.
The engine coolant temperature does not ● Thermostat

P0128
Thermostat function reach to specified temperature even though ● Leakage from sealing portion of thermostat
0128
the engine has run long enough. ● Engine coolant temperature sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CIK
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
● For best results, perform at ambient temperature of –10°C (14°F) or higher.
● For best results, perform at engine coolant temperature of –10°C (14°F) to 60°C (140°F).
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Replace thermostat with new one. Refer to CO-17, "THERMOSTAT AND WATER PIPING" . Use only a
genuine NISSAN thermostat as a replacement. If an incorrect thermostat is used, the MIL may come on.
3. Select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Check that the “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F).
If it is below 60°C (140°F), go to following step.
If it is above 60°C (140°F), cool down the engine to less than 60°C (140°F), then retry from step 1.
5. Drive vehicle for 10 consecutive minutes under the following conditions.
VHCL SPEED SE 80 - 120 km/h (50 - 75 MPH)
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-182, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST
1. Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CIL

OK or NG
Component Inspection UBS00CIM

Check resistance as shown in the figure.
PBIB2064E

DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION
<Reference data> A
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
EC
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.0
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. C
SEF012P
D
Removal and Installation UBS00CIN

Refer to CO-17, "THERMOSTAT AND WATER PIPING" . E

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 PFP:226A0
Component Description UBS00CIO
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),

monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the sig-
nal from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates volt-
age from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner condi-
tions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for
engine control operation.
SEF327R
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CIP

HO2S2 (B1) ● Warm-up condition 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
HO2S2 (B2) ● After keeping engine speed 1.0V
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for quickly.
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute LEAN ←→ RICH
HO2S2 MNTR (B2) under no load.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CIQ
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time

between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The oxy-
gen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the
longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen
sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the voltage is unusually high during
the various driving condition such as fuel-cut.
PBIB1848E
P0138
0138
(Bank 1) Heated oxygen sensor An excessively high voltage from the sensor is (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
P0158 2 circuit high voltage sent to ECM.
● Heated oxygen sensor 2
0158
(Bank 2)

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CIR
A
CAUTION:
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II C
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
D
ture.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and E
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-189, "Diagnostic Procedure" F
. SEF174Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. G

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
Wiring Diagram UBS00CIS
BANK 1
BBWA1158E

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm

55 R quickly after the following conditions are met 0 - Approximately 1.0V
(bank 1) D
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1 minute under no load
E

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
BANK 2
BBWA1159E

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

74 L quickly after the following conditions are met 0 - Approximately 1.0V
(bank 2) D
E
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CIT

F
G
BBIA0354E J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. K

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
2. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
BBIA0435E
2. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and body ground.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

● Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and body ground

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor C
P0138 55 1 1
P0158 74 1 2
D
3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. E
Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor F
P0138 55 1 1
P0158 74 1 2
G
Continuity should not exist.
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
I
5. CHECK HO2S2 CONNECTOR FOR WATER
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. J
3. Check connectors for water.
K
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. L
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
6. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
Component Inspection UBS00CIU

With CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
ture.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
SEF174Y
6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select

“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.
PBIB1672E
7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
PBIB1210E
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.70V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 55 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 74 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
engine ground.

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load

at least 10 times. A
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.70V at least once during this
procedure.
EC
If the voltage is above 0.70V at step 6, step 7 is not neces-
sary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D C
position.
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this PBIB2054E
procedure. D
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 E
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads (using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12) and approved anti-seize lubricant. F
Removal and Installation UBS00CIV

Refer to EM-19, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . G

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 PFP:226A0
Component Description UBS00CIW

monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates volt-
tions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for
SEF327R
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CIX

between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for quickly.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CIY

gen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the
sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the switching response of the sen-
sor's voltage is faster than specified during the various driving condi-
tion such as fuel-cut.
SEF302U
P0139 ● Harness or connectors
0139 (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
(Bank 1) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2
Heated oxygen sensor It takes more time for the sensor to respond
P0159 2 circuit slow response between rich and lean than the specified time. ● Fuel pressure
0159 ● Injectors
(Bank 2) ● Intake air leaks

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CIZ
A
NOTE:
EC
WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F).
C
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera- D
ture.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and E
6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C F
(158°F). SEF174Y
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN
TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).
G
7. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P0139” or “HO2S2 (B2) P0159” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-II.
8. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-II.
H
K
PBIB0115E
9. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.

If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-200, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
L
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
b. Return to step 1.
M
Overall Function Check UBS00CJ0
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
engine ground.

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2

at least 10 times.
A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 sec-
ond during this procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not nec-
essary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position.
A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 sec- PBIB2054E
ond during this procedure.

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
Wiring Diagram UBS00CJ1
BANK 1 A
EC
BBWA1158E

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]

(bank 1)

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
BANK 2
A
EC
BBWA1159E

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]

(bank 2)
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CJ2

BBIA0354E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA A

With CONSULT-II
EC
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
C
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
D
E
SEF968Y
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. F
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart
G
and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector.
H
5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
I
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected? BBIA0368E
J
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-206 or EC-215 .
K
No >> GO TO 3.

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

BBIA0435E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

● Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and body ground

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
5. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor C
P0139 55 1 1
P0159 74 1 2
D
Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor F
P0139 55 1 1
P0159 74 1 2
G
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
I
6. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EC-203, "Component Inspection" . J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2. K

Refer to EC-125, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . L
>> INSPECTION END

M
Component Inspection UBS00CJ3

With CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
ture.
SEF174Y

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2

“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.
PBIB1672E
PBIB1210E
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.70V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 018V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
Without CONSULT-II
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
engine ground.
at least 10 times.
procedure.
sary.
position.
procedure.
CAUTION:

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
Removal and Installation UBS00CJ4
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 A

Refer to EM-19, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
EC

DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION PFP:16600
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CJ5
With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the A/F sensors 1. The ECM calcu-
lates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (the actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic).
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas Fuel injection
Heated oxygen sensors 1 Fuel injector
(Mixture ratio feedback signal) control
P0171 ● Intake air leaks
0171 ● A/F sensor 1
(Bank 1)
● Injector
● Fuel injection system does not operate properly.
Fuel injection system too ● Exhaust gas leaks
lean ● The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too
P0174 ● Incorrect fuel pressure
large. (The mixture ratio is too lean.)
0174 ● Lack of fuel
(Bank 2)
● Incorrect PCV hose connection
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CJ6
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
6. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 should be detected at this
stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-210, "Diagnostic
Procedure" .
7. If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system
has a malfunction, too.
8. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine
starts, go to EC-210, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not SEF968Y
start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.

WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. A
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then
restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. EC
nector.
5. Select MODE 3 with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is detected. C
6. Select MODE 4 with GST and erase the DTC P0102.
D
8. Select MODE 7 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174
should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go
to EC-210, "Diagnostic Procedure" . BBIA0368E
E
has a malfunction.
10. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-210, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually. F

Wiring Diagram UBS00CJ7
BANK 1
BBWA1162E

BANK 2
A
EC
BBWA0882E

Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CJ8
1. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK

1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold).
PBIB1216E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK

1. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
2. Check PCV hose connection.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT A

2. Disconnect corresponding A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
EC
BBIA0376E
E
4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. F
Bank 1 Bank 2
ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal G
16 1 76 1
35 5 57 5
H
56 6 58 6
75 2 77 2
I
Bank 1 Bank 2
K
16 1 76 1
35 5 57 5
56 6 58 6 L
75 2 77 2
Continuity should not exist. M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE

2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-46, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .
At idling: 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.


● Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-579, "FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT" .)
● Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-46, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .)
● Fuel lines
>> Repair or replace.

With CONSULT-II
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3.0 - 9.0 g·m/sec: at idling
9.0 - 28.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
With GST
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST.
9.0 - 28.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
engine grounds. Refer to EC-144, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" .

7. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS A

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
EC
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop. C
E
PBIB0133E
Without CONSULT-II F
1. Start engine.
2. Listen to each injector operating sound.
Clicking noise should be heard. G
PBIB1986E
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-573, "INJECTOR CIRCUIT" . K
8. CHECK INJECTOR
1. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle. L
3. Disconnect all injector harness connectors.
4. Remove injector gallery assembly. Refer to EM-29, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" . M
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.
5. For DTC P0171, reconnect injector harness connectors on bank 1.
For DTC P0174, reconnect injector harness connectors on bank 2.
6. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
7. Prepare pans or saucers under each injector.
8. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
For DTC P0171, make sure that fuel sprays out from injectors
on bank 1.
For DTC P0174, make sure that fuel sprays out from injectors
on bank 2.
Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each injector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace injectors from which fuel does not spray out.
Always replace O-ring with new ones. PBIB1726E


>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION PFP:16600

A
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CJ9
With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the A/F sensors 1. The ECM calcu- EC
lates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (the actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic).
C
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas Fuel injection
Heated oxygen sensors 1 Fuel injector
(Mixture ratio feedback signal) control
D
P0172 ● A/F sensor 1 E
0172
● Fuel injection system does not operate properly. ● Injector
(Bank 1) Fuel injection system too
● The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too ● Exhaust gas leaks
P0175 rich
large. (The mixture ratio is too rich.) ● Incorrect fuel pressure F
0175
(Bank 2) ● Mass air flow sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CJA

G
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. H
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. I
SULT-II.
J
K
The 1st trip DTC P0172, P0175 should be detected at this stage,
if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-219, "Diagnostic Proce-
dure" .
7. If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system L
has a malfunction, too.
8. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
If engine starts, go to EC-219, "Diagnostic Procedure" . M
SEF968Y
If engine does not start, remove ignition plugs and check for
fouling, etc.

WITH GST
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then
restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
nector.
5. Select MODE 3 with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is detected.
6. Select MODE 4 with GST and erase the DTC P0102.
8. Select MODE 7 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175
should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go
to EC-219, "Diagnostic Procedure" . BBIA0368E

has a malfunction.
10. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
If engine starts, go to EC-219, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, remove ignition plugs and
check for fouling, etc.

Wiring Diagram UBS00CJB
BANK 1 A
EC
BBWA1162E

BANK 2
BBWA0882E

Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CJC
1. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK A

2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold). EC
E
PBIB1216E
OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK G
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 3.
I

3. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect corresponding A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
BBIA0376E

Bank 1 Bank 2
16 1 76 1
35 5 57 5
56 6 58 6
75 2 77 2

Bank 1 Bank 2
16 1 76 1
35 5 57 5
56 6 58 6
75 2 77 2

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

At idling: 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A

● Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to, EC-579, "FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT" .)
● Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-46, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .) EC

C
With CONSULT-II D
2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
E
9.0 - 28.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
With GST F
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST.
G
9.0 - 28.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
engine grounds. Refer to EC-144, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" . I

7. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
CONSULT-II.
speed drop.
PBIB0133E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
Clicking noise should be heard.
PBIB1986E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-573, "INJECTOR CIRCUIT" .
8. CHECK INJECTOR
1. Remove injector assembly. Refer to EM-29, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
5. Prepare pans or saucers under each injectors.
6. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
Make sure fuel does not drip from injector.
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 9.
NG (Drips.)>>Replace the injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one.

>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR PFP:22630

A
Component Description UBS00CJD
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel tempera-
ture inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from EC
the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temper-
ature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the
change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases as temperature increases. C
BBIA0583E
E
<Reference data>
Fluid temperature Voltage* Resistance
F
°C (°F) V kΩ
20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90 G
(Fuel tank temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION: H
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CJE
Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is ● Harness or connectors
Fuel tank temperature
P0181 sent to ECM, compared with the voltage sig- (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
sensor circuit range/
0181 nals from engine coolant temperature sensor K
performance ● Fuel tank temperature sensor
and intake air temperature sensor.
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CJF

L
NOTE:
M
WITH CONSULT-II
If the result is NG, go to EC-226, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the result is OK, go to following step.
4. Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” value.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C (140°F), the result will
be OK.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F), go to the following
step.
SEF174Y
5. Cool engine down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C
(140°F).

WITH GST

Wiring Diagram UBS00CJG
EC
BBWA1164E

Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CJH
1. CHECK DTC WITH COMBINATION METER

Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Go to DI-22, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection" .

BBIA0354E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness con-
nector.
BBIA0583E
3. Check voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0932E


● Harness connectors C1, E41
● Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” EC
>> Repair harness or connector.

C
5. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. D
2. Disconnect combination meter harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 5 and combination
meter terminal 16. Refer to Wiring Diagram. E
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6. G
Check the following. H
● Harness connectors E152, M31
● Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and combination meter I
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connector.
J
7. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-227, "Component Inspection" . K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. L

Refer to EC-125, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . M
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00CJI
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Remove fuel level sensor unit.

2. Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminals 4 and 5 by heating with hot water or heat gun as
shown in the figure.
20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90
PBIB0931E
Removal and Installation UBS00CJJ

Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .

DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR PFP:22630

A
Component Description UBS00CJK
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel tempera-
ture inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from EC
the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temper-
ature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the
change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases as temperature increases. C
BBIA0583E
E
<Reference data>
Fluid temperature Voltage* Resistance
F
°C (°F) V kΩ
20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90 G
(Fuel tank temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION: H
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CJL
P0182 Fuel tank temperature An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
P0183 Fuel tank temperature An excessively high voltage from the sensor is K
● Fuel tank temperature sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CJM

L
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. M
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF174Y
WITH GST

Wiring Diagram UBS00CJN
BBWA1164E

Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CJO
1. CHECK DTC WITH COMBINATION METER A

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 2.
C
D
BBIA0354E
Refer to EC-131, "Ground Inspection" . H

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. I
3. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness con- J
nector.
K
BBIA0583E
M
3. Check voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0932E


● Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
>> Repair harness or connector.
5. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 5 and combination
meter terminal 16. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

● Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and combination meter
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connector.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00CJP

1. Remove fuel level sensor unit.

2. Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminals 4 and 5 by heating with hot water or heat gun as A
shown in the figure.
EC
20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90
PBIB0931E
D
Removal and Installation UBS00CJQ

E

DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR PFP:16119
Component Description UBS00CJR

throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addi-
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig-
PBIB0145E
tion.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CJS

THRTL SEN2* Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
● Shift lever: D
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CJT

P0222 Throttle position sensor An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor ● Harness or connectors
0222 1 circuit low input 1 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
(APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)
P0223 Throttle position sensor An excessively high voltage from the TP sen- ● Electric throttle control actuator
0223 1 circuit high input sor 1 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 1)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
degrees.

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CJU
A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
D
SEF058Y
WITH GST G

Wiring Diagram UBS00CJV
BBWA1166E

CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply C
● Engine stopped D
More than 0.36V
● Shift lever: D
[Ignition switch: ON] E
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Shift lever: D
● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed F
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed G
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V H
● Shift lever: D
[Ignition switch: ON] I
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
● Shift lever: D
● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed J
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CJW

K

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. L
BBIA0354E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

BBIA0371E
3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB2065E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 6.

6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY A

3. Perform EC-43, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . EC
C
>> INSPECTION END
7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
D
3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 4 and ECM terminal 66. E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. G
8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT H
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 1.
I
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 9.
K
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.
M
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00CJX
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

69 (TP sensor 2signal) and engine ground under the following
conditions.
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage

69 Fully released Less than 4.75V

step.
Removal and Installation UBS00CJY

Refer to EM-15, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .

DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MIS-
FIRE

FIRE PFP:00000 A
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CJZ
When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the crank- EC
shaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring.
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed On board diagnosis of misfire C
The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions.

1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage) D
On the first trip that a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to over-
heating, the MIL will blink.
When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 200 engine revolutions
for a change. E
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will turn off.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a second trip, the MIL will blink.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will remain on. F
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MIL will begin to blink again.
2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration)
For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MIL will only G
light when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the CKP sen-
sor signal every 1,000 engine revolutions.
A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or on multiple cylinders.
H
P0300 Multiple cylinder misfire
Multiple cylinder misfire. I
0300 detected
P0301 No.1 cylinder misfire
No. 1 cylinder misfires.
0301 detected ● Improper spark plug
P0302 No. 2 cylinder misfire ● Insufficient compression J
0302 detected ● Incorrect fuel pressure
P0303 No. 3 cylinder misfire ● The injector circuit is open or shorted
0303 detected ● Fuel injector K
P0304 No. 4 cylinder misfire ● Intake air leak
0304 detected ● The ignition signal circuit is open or
P0305 No. 5 cylinder misfire shorted L
0305 detected ● Lack of fuel
P0306 No. 6 cylinder misfire ● Signal plate
0306 detected ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 M
P0307 No. 7 cylinder misfire ● Incorrect PCV hose connection
0307 detected
P0308 No. 8 cylinder misfire
0308 detected
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CK0
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws when driv-
ing.
NOTE:

FIRE
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON, and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
4. Restart engine and let it idle for about 15 minutes.
.
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing
the following procedure is advised. PBIB0164E

2. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain
time. Refer to the table below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following con-
ditions should be satisfied at the same time.
Engine speed Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm
Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F),
Engine coolant temperature T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F).
(T) condition When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F).
The time to driving varies according to the engine speed in the freeze frame data.
Engine speed Time
Around 1,000 rpm Approximately 10 minutes
Around 2,000 rpm Approximately 5 minutes
More than 3,000 rpm Approximately 3.5 minutes
WITH GST
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CK1
1. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE

1. Start engine and run it at idle speed.
2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak.
3. Check PCV hose connection.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Discover air leak location and repair.
2. CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING

Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst and muffler for dents.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace it.

FIRE
3. PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST A

With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
EC
2. Is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary
engine speed drop?
PBIB0133E
E
Without CONSULT-II
When disconnecting each injector harness connector one at a time, is there any cylinder which does not pro-
duce a momentary engine speed drop? F
I
BBIA0374E
Yes or No J
Yes >> GO TO 4.
No >> GO TO 7.
K
4. CHECK INJECTOR
Does each injector make an operating sound at idle?
Yes or No L
Yes >> GO TO 5.
No >> Check injector(s) and circuit(s). Refer to EC-573,
"INJECTOR CIRCUIT" . M
PBIB1986E

FIRE
5. CHECK IGNITION SPARK

2. Remove ignition coil assembly from rocker cover.
3. Remove spark plug from ignition coil assembly.
4. Connect a known-good spark plug to the ignition coil.
5. Disconnect all injectorharness connectors.
6. Place end of spark plug against a suitable ground and crank engine.
7. Check for spark.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits.
Refer to EC-561, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .
SEF575Q
6. CHECK SPARK PLUGS

Remove the spark plugs and check for fouling, etc.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace spark plug(s) with standard type
one(s). For spark plug type, refer to, MA-18, "Changing
Spark Plugs" .
SEF156I
7. CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE

Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-59, "CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE" .
Standard: 1,520 kPa (15.5 kg/cm2 , 200 psi)/200 rpm
Minimum: 1,324 kPa (13.5 kg/cm2 , 192 psi)/200 rpm
Difference between each 98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2 , 14 psi)/200 rpm
cylinder:
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets.

At idle: Approx. 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.

FIRE

● Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-579, "FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT" .)
● Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-46, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .) EC
● Fuel lines
C
10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING D
Check the following items. Refer to EC-78, "Basic Inspection" .

E
Items Specifications
Target idle speed 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
Ignition timing 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Follow the EC-78, "Basic Inspection" . G

FIRE
11. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
BBIA0376E

Refer to Wiring Diagram, EC-429, "Wiring Diagram" .
Bank 1 Bank 2
A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal
1 16 1 76
2 75 2 77
5 35 5 57
6 56 6 58

Bank 1 Bank 2
1 16 1 76
2 75 2 77
5 35 5 57
6 56 6 58

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors between ECM
and A/F sensor 1.
12. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Replace (malfunctioning) A/F sensor 1.

FIRE
13. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR A

With CONSULT-II
Check mass air flow sensor signal in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3.0 - 9.0 g·m/sec: at idling EC
9.0 - 28.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
With GST C
Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST.
9.0 - 28.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14. E
engine grounds. Refer to EC-144, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" .
14. CHECK SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART F
Check items on the rough idle symptom in EC-83, "Symptom Matrix Chart" .
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 15.
H
15. ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC
Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set.
Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE I
>> GO TO 16. J

K
>> INSPECTION END L

DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS PFP:22060
Component Description UBS00CK2
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine

knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from
the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is
converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
PBIB0021E
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CK3
The MIL will not light up for these diagnoses.

P0327
0327
(bank 1) Knock sensor circuit low An excessively low voltage from the sensor
input is sent to ECM.
P0332
0332 ● Harness or connectors
(bank 2) (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P0328 ● Knock sensor
0328
(bank 1) Knock sensor circuit high An excessively high voltage from the sensor
input is sent to ECM.
P0333
0333
(bank 2)
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CK4
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
SEF058Y
WITH GST

DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
Wiring Diagram UBS00CK5
EC
BBWA1171E

DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
15 W Knock sensor (bank 1) [Engine is running]

Approximately 2.5V
36 W Knock sensor (bank 2) ● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CK6
1. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
3. Check resistance between ECM terminals 15, 36 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ.
Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 15 and knock
sensor (bank1) terminal 1, ECM terminal 36 and knock sensor
(bank 2) terminal 1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0021E
NG >> GO TO 3.

● Harness connectors F26, F101
● Harness for open or short between ECM and knock sensor
4. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace knock sensor.

DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
5. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS A

EC
BBIA0354E
E
OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT G

2. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector. H
3. Check harness continuity between knock sensor terminal 2 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. J
NG >> GO TO 7.
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART K

● Harness connectors F26, F101
L
● Harness for open or short between knock sensor terminal 2 and body ground
M
>> Repair open circuit or short power in harness or connectors.

>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
Component Inspection UBS00CK7
KNOCK SENSOR
Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more
than 10 MΩ.
Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)]
CAUTION:
Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or phys-
ically damaged. Use only new ones.
SEF111Y
Removal and Installation UBS00CK8
KNOCK SENSOR
Refer to EM-74, "CYLINDER BLOCK" .

DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) PFP:23731

A
Component Description UBS00CK9
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the A/T assem-

bly facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluc- EC
tuation of the engine revolution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth
cause the gap with the sensor to change. C
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor D
changes.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of
PBIB0562E
the engine revolution.
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CKA

F
Almost the same speed as the
ENG SPEED ● Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer indication.
tachometer indication.
G
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CKB
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause H
● The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal
is not detected by the ECM during the first
few seconds of engine cranking.
● Harness or connectors I
● The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
P0335 Crankshaft position
position sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM
0335 sensor (POS) circuit ● Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
while the engine is running.
● Signal plate J
● The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal
is not in the normal pattern during engine
running.
K
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CKC
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at L
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with igni-
tion switch ON. M
WITH CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
2. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 sec-
onds at idle speed.
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST

Wiring Diagram UBS00CKD
BBWA1173E

Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. A
CAUTION:
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
1.0 - 2.0V
[Engine is running]
D
● Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle. E
PBIB1041E
Crankshaft position sensor
13 O
(POS)
1.0 - 2.0V
F
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. G
PBIB1042E
H
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CKE
I
2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. J
M
BBIA0354E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) harness
connector.
BBIA0367E
3. Check voltage between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 3 and

ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
SEF481Y

● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ECM
● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and IPDM E/R
4. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 1 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Dia-
gram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ground

6. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 13 and CKP sensor (POS) terminal 2.

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D
7. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)

Refer to EC-258, "Component Inspection" . E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS). F
8. CHECK GEAR TOOTH

G
Visually check for chipping signal plate gear tooth.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. H
NG >> Replace the signal plate.
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT I

>> INSPECTION END J

Component Inspection UBS00CKF
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)

1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector.
3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
PBIB0563E
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.

Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞
2 (+) - 3 (-)
PBIB0564E
Removal and Installation UBS00CKG
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)

Refer to AT-252, "TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY" .

DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE)
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE) PFP:23731

A
Component Description UBS00CKH
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the protrusion of

exhaust valve cam sprocket to identify a particular cylinder. The EC
camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoper-
ative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various con-
trols of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification C
signals.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause D
the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
PBIB0562E
change.
E
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CKI
F
● The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
for the first few seconds during engine G
cranking. ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
P0340 Camshaft position sen- ● Camshaft (Exhaust)
● The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM
0340 sor (PHASE) circuit
during engine running. ● Starter motor (Refer toSC-10 .)
H
● The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal ● Starting system circuit (Refer to SC-10 .)
pattern during engine running.
● Dead (Weak) battery
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CKJ

I
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. J
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with igni-
tion switch ON. K
WITH CONSULT-II
L
3. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 sec-
onds at idle speed.
M
.
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.
5. Maintaining engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5
seconds.
. SEF058Y
WITH GST

Wiring Diagram UBS00CKK
BBWA1198E

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
D
● Idle speed
NOTE:
idle. E
PBIB1039E
Camshaft position sensor
14 Y
(PHASE)
1.0 - 4.0V
F
[Engine is running]
PBIB1040E
H
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CKL
I
1. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM
Turn ignition switch to “START” position.
J
Does the engine turn over?
Does the starter motor operate?
Yes or No K
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Check starting system. (Refer to SC-10, "STARTING SYSTEM" .)
L
2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. M
BBIA0354E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) harness
connector.
BBIA0372E
3. Check voltage between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 3 and

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
SEF481Y

● Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and ECM
● Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and IPDM E/R
5. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 1 and body ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

● Harness for open or short between CMP sensor (PHASE) and body ground

7. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 14 and CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 2.

3. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D
8. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)

Refer to EC-264, "Component Inspection" . E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE). F

G
>> INSPECTION END H

Component Inspection UBS00CKM
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)

1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector.
3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
PBIB0563E
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.

3(+) - 1 (-)
2 (+) - 1 (-) Except 0 or ∞
3 (+) - 2 (-)
PBIB0564E
Removal and Installation UBS00CKN
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)

Refer to EM-43, "CAMSHAFT" .

DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION PFP:20905

A
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CKO
The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of air fuel sensor
(A/F) sensor 1 heated oxygen sensor 2. EC
A three way catalyst (manifold) with high oxygen storage capacity
will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2.
As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor 2
switching frequency will increase. C
When the frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 and heated
oxygen sensor 2 approaches a specified limit value, the three way
catalyst (manifold) malfunction is diagnosed. D
PBIB2055E
P0420 ● Three way catalyst (manifold) F
0420 ● Exhaust tube
(Bank 1) ● Three way catalyst (manifold) does not oper- ● Intake air leaks
Catalyst system effi- ate properly.
ciency below threshold
● Fuel injector G
P0430 ● Three way catalyst (manifold) does not have
enough oxygen storage capacity. ● Fuel injector leaks
0430
(Bank 2) ● Spark plug
● Improper ignition timing H
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CKP
NOTE: I
WITH CONSULT-II J
TESTING CONDITION:
Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified minutes below.
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with K
CONSULT-II.
ture. L
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. M
6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C
(158°F). SEF189Y
7. Open engine hood.

8. Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUP-

PORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
9. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and hold it for 3 consecu-
tive minutes then release the accelerator pedal completely.
If “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changed to “CMPLT”, go to step 12.
10. Wait 5 seconds at idle.
PBIB1784E
11. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and maintain it until

“INCMP” of “CATALYST” changes to “CMPLT” (It will take
approximately 5 minutes).
If not “CMPLT”, stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C
(158°F) and then retest from step 1.
PBIB1785E
12. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.

13. Confirm that the 1st trip DTC is not detected.
If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-267, "Diagnostic Proce-
dure" .
SEF535Z
Overall Function Check UBS00CVA
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the three way catalyst (manifold). During this check, a DTC
might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
6. Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminals ECM terminals 74
[HO2S2 (bank 1) signal], 55 [HO2S2 (bank 2) signal] and body
ground.
7. Keep engine speed at 2,500 rpm constant under no load.
8. Make sure that the voltage does not vary for more than 5 sec-
onds.
If the voltage fluctuation cycle takes less than 5 seconds, go to
EC-267, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
● 1 cycle: 0.6 - 1.0 → 0 - 0.3 → 0.6 - 1.0
PBIB2056E

Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CKR
1. CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM A
Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent.

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 2.
C
2. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK
D
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before the three way catalyst (manifold).
PBIB1216E
OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK I
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 4.
K
4. CHECK IGNITION TIMING
Check the following items. Refer to EC-78, "Basic Inspection" .
L
Items Specifications
Target idle speed 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
Ignition timing 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Follow the EC-78, "Basic Inspection" .

5. CHECK INJECTORS
1. Stop engine and then turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 40, 41, 42,
44, 63 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Refer to Wiring Diagram for Injectors, EC-574 .
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Perform EC-575, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
PBIB1527E
6. CHECK IGNITION SPARK

2. Disconnect ignition coil assembly from rocker cover.
3. Connect a known-good spark plug to the ignition coil assembly.
5. Place end of spark plug against a suitable ground and crank engine.
6. Check for spark.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Check ignition coil with power transistor and their circuit.
Refer to EC-561, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .
SEF575Q
7. CHECK INJECTOR
2. Remove injector assembly.
4. Reconnect injector harness connector.
Make sure fuel does not drip from injector.
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 8.
NG (Drips.)>>Replace the injector(s) from which fuel is dripping.

Trouble is fixed.>>INSPECTION END

Trouble is not fixed.>>Replace three way catalyst assembly.

DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:14950

A
System Description UBS00CKS
NOTE:
If DTC P0441 is displayed with other DTC such as P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128 or P2138, first perform EC
trouble diagnosis for other DTC.
H
PBIB1026E
In this evaporative emission (EVAP) control system, purge flow occurs during non-closed throttle conditions.
Purge volume is related to air intake volume. Under normal purge conditions (non-closed throttle), the EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve is open to admit purge flow. Purge flow exposes the EVAP con- I
trol system pressure sensor to intake manifold vacuum.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CKT
J
Under normal conditions (non-closed throttle), sensor output voltage indicates if pressure drop and purge flow
are adequate. If not, a malfunction is determined.
K
● EVAP canister purge volume control

solenoid valve stuck closed
L
and the circuit
● Loose, disconnected or improper con-
EVAP control system does not operate prop- nection of rubber tube M
P0441 EVAP control system erly, EVAP control system has a leak between ● Blocked rubber tube
0441 incorrect purge flow intake manifold and EVAP control system pres-
● Cracked EVAP canister
sure sensor.
● EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve circuit
● Blocked purge port
● EVAP canister vent control valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CKU
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.

WITH CONSULT-II
3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 70 seconds.
4. Select “PURG FLOW P0441” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
5. Touch “START”.
If “COMPLETED” is displayed, go to step 7.
6. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain
the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take at least 35 seconds.)
Vehicle speed 32 - 120 km/h (20 - 75 MPH)
ENG SPEED 500 - 3,000 rpm
B/FUEL SCHDL 1.0 - 12.0 msec
Engine coolant temperature 70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F)
PBIB0826E
If “TESTING” is not changed for a long time, retry from step 2.

7. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-
271, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Overall Function Check UBS00CKV
Use this procedure to check the overall monitoring function of the EVAP control system purge flow monitoring.
During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1. Lift up drive wheels.
2. Start engine (VDC switch OFF) and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Set voltmeter probes to ECM terminals 32 (EVAP control system
pressure sensor signal) and ground.
6. Check EVAP control system pressure sensor value at idle speed
and note it.
7. Establish and maintain the following conditions for at least 1
minute.
Air conditioner switch ON
Headlamp switch ON
Rear window defogger switch ON
PBIB1109E
Engine speed Approx. 3,000 rpm
Gear position Any position other than P, N or R
8. Verify that EVAP control system pressure sensor value stays 0.1V less than the value at idle speed (mea-
sured at step 6) for at least 1 second.


A
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CKW
1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER

EC
2. Check EVAP canister for cracks.
OK or NG
C
NG >> Replace EVAP canister.
D
2. CHECK PURGE FLOW
With CONSULT-II E
1. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP ser-
vice port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-604, "EVAPORA-
TIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . F
3. Select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm. G
5. Touch “Qd” and “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to adjust “PURG
VOL CONT/V” opening and check vacuum existence.
H
PURG VOL CONT/V Vacuum
100% Should exist.
0% Should not exist. I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 4. J
PBIB1678E
3. CHECK PURGE FLOW K
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. L
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP ser-
vice port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-604, "EVAPORA- M
TIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
Do not depress accelerator pedal even slightly.
5. Check vacuum gauge indication before 60 seconds passed after starting engine.
Vacuum should not exist.
6. Revving engine up to 2,000 rpm after 100 seconds passed after starting engine.
Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 4.

4. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE

2. Check EVAP purge line for improper connection or disconnection.
Refer to EC-604, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair it.
5. CHECK EVAP PURGE HOSE AND PURGE PORT

1. Disconnect purge hoses connected to EVAP service port A and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve B .
2. Blow air into each hose and EVAP purge port C .
SEF367U
3. Check that air flows freely.

OK or NG
NG >> Repair or clean hoses and/or purge port.
SEF368U
6. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
PBIB1678E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.

8. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR A

1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. C
NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION D

Refer to DTC Confirmation Procedure for DTC P0452 EC-300 , P0453 EC-306 .
OK or NG
E
OK >> GO TO 10.
10. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING F
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.

2. Check the rubber tube for clogging. G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower. H
11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

Refer to EC-295, "Component Inspection" . I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. J

K
Inspect EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube). Check for evidence of leaks.
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Replace it.
13. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE M
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
>> GO TO 14.

>> INSPECTION END

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CKX
This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using engine intake manifold vacuum.
If pressure does not increase, the ECM will check for leaks in the line between the fuel tank and EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve, under the following “Vacuum test” conditions.
The EVAP canister vent control valve is closed to shut the EVAP purge line off. The EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve will then be opened to depressurize the EVAP purge line using intake manifold
vacuum. After this occurs, the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will be closed.
PBIB1026E
● Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
● Incorrect fuel filler cap used
● Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close.
● Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.
● Leak is in line between intake manifold and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve.
● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent
control valve.
● EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
● EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks
EVAP control system EVAP control system has a leak, EVAP ● EVAP purge line rubber tube bent
P0442
small leak detected control system does not operate prop-
0442 ● Loose or disconnected rubber tube
(negative pressure) erly.
● EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve and the circuit
● O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is
missing or damaged
● EVAP canister is saturated with water
● Fuel level sensor and the circuit
● Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve
● ORVR system leaks

CAUTION:
● Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, A
the MIL may come on.
● If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on.
● Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement. EC
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CKY
NOTE: C
● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
D
● Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is
placed on flat level surface.
● Always perform test at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F). E
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. F
4. Make sure that the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F) G
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 30°C (32 - 86°F)
5. Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II. H
Follow the instruction displayed.
PBIB0829E
NOTE: L
If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to
EC-78, "Basic Inspection" .
M
6. Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
NOTE:
Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve properly.
SEC763C
WITH GST
NOTE:
Be sure to read the explanation of EC-58, "Driving Pattern" before driving vehicle.
1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle according to EC-58, "Driving Pattern" .

3. Stop vehicle.
– If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-276, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
– If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-271, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CKZ
1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN

2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
SEF915U
2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION

Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard.
3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION

Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE

Refer to EC-606, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.

5. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP A

To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pres-
sure pump to EVAP service port securely. For the location of EVAP
service port, refer to EC-604, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE EC
DRAWING" .
D
BBIA0366E
SEF916U
H
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking.
I
J

6. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the
pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
NOTE:
● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
● Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pres-

sure in the system.
PEF917U
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to EC-604, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING"
.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
SEF200U

7. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK A

Without CONSULT-II
EC
2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts
until the end of test.)
BBIA0403E
F
3. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg),
then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter.
NOTE:
● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. G
Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
●
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak H
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer
to EC-604, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
I
OK >> GO TO 8.
J
SEF200U
K
Check the following. L
● EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly.
Refer to EC-607, "Removal and Installation" .
● EVAP canister vent control valve. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring.

9. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER

1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 10.
No (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12.
No (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13.
BBIA0351E

Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.2 kg (4.9 lb).
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 11.

● EVAP canister for damage
● EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection
>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL
CONT/V” opening to 100%.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to
2,000 rpm.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14.
PBIB1678E

13. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION A
Without CONSULT-II
EC
2. Stop engine.
C
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 14.
E
14. CHECK VACUUM HOSE
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-23, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" . F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. G

Refer to EC-288, "Component Inspection" . H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. I

J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17. K
17. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR L

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18. M

Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.
NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose.
19. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE

>> GO TO 20.

20. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE

Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper con-
nection. For location, refer to EC-610, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21.
NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
21. CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE

Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and
improper connection.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 22.
NG >> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube.
22. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 23.
NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
23. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

Refer to DI-22, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 24.

>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE

VALVE PFP:14920 A
Description UBS00CL0
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION EC
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*1
C
D
EVAP canister EVAP canister purge vol-
purge flow control ume control solenoid valve
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position E
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
A/F sensor 1
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank F
*1:ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. G
This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass pas-
sage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP H
canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is
determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor
from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes. I
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/
J
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canis-
ter. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse,
the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve. K
PBIB2057E
M
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CL1

● Engine: After warming up Idle
● Shift lever: N
● No load 2,000 rpm —

VALVE
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CL2
EVAP canister purge volume (The solenoid valve circuit is open or
P0444 An excessively low voltage signal is sent shorted.)
control solenoid valve circuit
0444 to ECM through the valve
open ● EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
EVAP canister purge volume (The solenoid valve circuit is shorted.)
P0445 An excessively high voltage signal is sent
control solenoid valve circuit
0445 to ECM through the valve ● EVAP canister purge volume control
shorted
solenoid valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CL3
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST

VALVE
Wiring Diagram UBS00CL4
EC
BBWA0891E

VALVE
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
EVAP canister purge vol-

45 L/Y PBIB0050E
ume control solenoid valve
11 - 14V
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More
PBIB0051E
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
120 BR (11 - 14V)

VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CL5
1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIR- A
CUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. EC
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
harness connector.
E
BBIA0366E
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control F

solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2. H
PBIB0148E
I

J
● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R K
● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM
>> Repair harness or connectors. L
3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIR-
CUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT M
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 45 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG

VALVE

With CONSULT-II
2. Start engine.
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB1678E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00CL6
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve under the following conditions.
Condition Air passage continuity
(PURG VOL CONT/V value) between A and B
100% Yes
0% No
PBIB2058E
Without CONSULT-II
solenoid valve under the following conditions.
Air passage continuity
Condition
between A and B
12V direct current supply between
Yes
terminals 1 and 2
No supply No
PBIB2059E

VALVE
Removal and Installation UBS00CL7
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A

EC

DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE PFP:14935
Component Description UBS00CL8
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canis-
ter and is used to seal the canister vent.
This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the
ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized.
A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal
the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative
emission control system components.
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains
opened.
When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evapo-
rative emission control system is depressurized and allows “EVAP
PBIB1263E
Control System” diagnosis.
BBIA0403E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CL9

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CLA
P0447 EVAP canister vent con- An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM (The valve circuit is open or shorted.)
0447 trol valve circuit open through EVAP canister vent control valve.

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CLB
A
NOTE:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
D
.
E
SEF058Y
G
WITH GST
H

Wiring Diagram UBS00CLC
BBWA0893E

CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
EVAP canister vent control BATTERY VOLTAGE C
valve (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CLD

D
1. INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No E
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.
F
2. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II G
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then turn ON.
2. Select “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ON/OFF” on CONSULT-II screen. H
4. Check for operating sound of the valve.
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
J
PBIB1679E K

3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect EVAP canister vent control valve harness connector.
BBIA0403E

4. Check voltage between EVAP canister vent control valve termi-
nal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0152E

● Harness connectors E41, C1
● IPDM E/R harness connector E119
● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and IPDM E/R
5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 117 and EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.


● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and ECM EC
C
7. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. D
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. E
NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE F

OK or NG
G
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT H

I
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection UBS00CLE
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE J

With CONSULT-II
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
K
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being
rusted.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
If OK, go to next step. L
3. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
M
PBIB1033E
5. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.

6. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
Condition VENT CONTROL/V Air passage continuity between A and B
ON No
OFF Yes
Operation takes less than 1 second.

If OK, go to next step. PBIB1679E

7. Clean the air passage (portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
8. Perform step 6 again.
Without CONSULT-II
rusted.
PBIB1033E
3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the
following conditions.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
Condition Air passage continuity between A and B
No
terminals 1 and 2
OFF Yes
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. PBIB1034E
If OK, go to next step.

4. Clean the air passage (portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.

DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR PFP:22365

A
Component Description UBS00CLF
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the
ECM increases as pressure increases. EC
E
BBIA0403E
PBIB1207E I
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CLG
Specification data are reference values. J

K
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CLH
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause L
P0451 EVAP control system pressure ECM detects a sloshing signal from the ● Harness or connectors
0451 sensor performance EVAP control system pressure sensor ● EVAP control system pressure sensor
M

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CLI
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
NOTE:
Do not depress accelerator pedal even slightly.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-298, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF194Y
WITH GST
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CLJ

BBIA0354E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR WATER A

EC
BBIA0403E
2. Check sensor harness connector for water. E

OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace harness connector.
G
3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
I
Refer to EC-125, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . J
For wiring diagram, refer to EC-302, "Wiring Diagram" .
>> INSPECTION END K

Component Inspection UBS00CLK
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister. L
Always replace O-ring with a new one.
2. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM M
terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions.
Applied vacuum kPa
Voltage V
(mmHg, inHg)
Not applied 1.8 - 4.8
-26.7 (-200, -7.87) 2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value
CAUTION:
● Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
● Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or PBIB1173E
pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg).
4. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

Component Description UBS00CLL
ECM increases as pressure increases.
BBIA0403E
PBIB1207E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CLM

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CLN
P0452 EVAP control system pressure An excessively low voltage from the (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0452 sensor low input sensor is sent to ECM.

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CLO
A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. C
D
5. Make sure that “FUEL T/TEMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F).
6. Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds. E
.
F
G
SEF194Y
WITH GST H
2. Check that voltage between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank tem-
perature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V. I
5. Select MODE 7 with GST. J
.
K
PBIB1110E

Wiring Diagram UBS00CLP
BBWA1175E

CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
EVAP control system pressure C
sensor
Sensor power supply
48 SB (EVAP control system pressure [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
D
sensor)
[Engine is running]
E
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CLQ
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS F

2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. G
J
BBIA0354E

K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
L
2. CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. M
BBIA0403E
2. Check sensor harness connector for water.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0138E

● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal
67.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.


7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND A
SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 32 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal
2. EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. D
NG >> GO TO 8.

E
● Harness connectors E5, F14 F
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G

H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. I
10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT J

>> INSPECTION END K
Component Inspection UBS00CLR
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR L

1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister.
2. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor. M
3. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM
Applied vacuum kPa
Voltage V
(mmHg, inHg)
CAUTION:
● Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
4. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

Component Description UBS00CLS
ECM increases as pressure increases.
BBIA0403E
PBIB1207E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CLT

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CLU
P0453 EVAP control system pressure An excessively high voltage from the
0453 sensor high input sensor is sent to ECM.
● EVAP canister
● Rubber hose from EVAP canister vent
control valve to vehicle frame

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CLV
A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. C
D
5. Make sure that “FUEL T/TEMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F).
6. Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds. E
.
F
G
SEF194Y
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. H
2. Check that voltage between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank tem-
perature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. I
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-309, "Diagnostic Procedure" J
.
K
PBIB1110E

Wiring Diagram UBS00CLW
BBWA1175E

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. A
CAUTION:
EC
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
EVAP control system pressure
sensor
Sensor power supply
48 SB (EVAP control system pressure [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V D
sensor)
[Engine is running]
67 R Sensor ground ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V E
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CLX

F
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. G
BBIA0354E
Refer to EC-131, "Ground Inspection" . K

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. L

2. CHECK CONNECTOR
BBIA0403E
2. Check sensor harness connector for water.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0138E


5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND A
SHORT
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. EC
3. Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal
67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. C
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6. E
Check the following. F
● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM G
H
7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
I
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 32 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal
2.
J
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.
L
Check the following. M
9. CHECK RUBBER TUBE

2. Check the rubber tube for clogging, vent or kinked.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower, repair or replace rubber tube.


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.

attached.
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 13.
No >> GO TO 15.
BBIA0351E

attached.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14.


>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00CLY
EVAP CONTROL PRESSURE SENSOR A

1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister.
2. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor. EC
3. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM
C
Applied vacuum kPa
Voltage V
(mmHg, inHg)
D
CAUTION:
● Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. E

4. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. F

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CLZ
This diagnosis detects a very large leak (fuel filler cap fell off etc.) in EVAP system between the fuel tank and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
PBIB1026E
● Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to
close.
● Leak is in line between intake manifold and
EVAP canister purge volume control sole-
noid valve.
● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister
vent control valve.
EVAP control system has a very large leak ● EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube)
P0455 EVAP control system leaks
such as fuel filler cap fell off, EVAP control
0455 gross leak detected
system does not operate properly. ● EVAP purge line rubber tube bent.
● Loose or disconnected rubber tube
● EVAP canister vent control valve and the
circuit
● EVAP canister purge volume control sole-
noid valve and the circuit
● O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve
is missing or damaged.
CAUTION:
● Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used,
● Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CM0
A
CAUTION:
Never remove fuel filler cap during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
NOTE:
● Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve EC
properly.
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. C
TESTING CONDITION:
● Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is
placed on flat level surface. D
● Open engine hood before conducting the following procedures.
WITH CONSULT-II E
1. Tighten fuel filler cap securely until ratcheting sound is heard.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. F
5. Make sure that the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F) G
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 60°C (32 - 140°F)
6. Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II. H
PBIB0829E
NOTE: L
If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to
EC-78, "Basic Inspection" .
7. Make sure that “OK” is displayed. M
If “NG” is displayed, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode and
make sure that “EVAP GROSS LEAK [P0455]” is displayed. If it
is displayed, refer to EC-316, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If P0442 is displayed, perform Diagnostic Procedure for DTC
P0442 EC-276, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEC763C

WITH GST
NOTE:
Be sure to read the explanation of EC-58, "Driving Pattern" before driving vehicle.
1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle according to EC-58, "Driving Pattern" .
3. Stop vehicle.
● If P0455 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-316, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CM1
1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN

2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
SEF915U

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.

5. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE A

Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks, improper connection or
disconnection.
Refer to EC-604, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. C

Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower. D
>> GO TO 7.
E
Check the following. F
● EVAP canister vent control valve. G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. H
8. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP I

sure pump to EVAP service port securely.
NOTE: J
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the
EVAP service port may cause leaking.
K
L
BBIA0366E
SEF916U


With CONSULT-II
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
NOTE:
● Do not use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
● Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pres-

sure in the system.
PEF917U
.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
SEF200U


Without CONSULT-II
EC
BBIA0403E
F
NOTE:
● Do not use compressed air or a high pressure pump. G
●
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak H
OK or NG
I
OK >> GO TO 12.
J
SEF200U
K
With CONSULT-II L
2. Start engine.
M
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
2,000 rpm.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 13.
PBIB1678E

Without CONSULT-II
2. Stop engine.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 13.

Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-23, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" .
OK or NG

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15.
PBIB1678E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.

17. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR A

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18. EC
18. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE C

D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.
E
Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 20. G
NG >> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube.
20. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE H

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21. I

K
>> INSPECTION END

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CM2
This diagnosis detects very small leaks in the EVAP line between fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve, using the intake manifold vacuum in the same way as conventional EVAP small leak
diagnosis.
If ECM judges a leak which corresponds to a very small leak, the very small leak P0456 will be detected.
If ECM judges a leak equivalent to a small leak, EVAP small leak P0442 will be detected.
If ECM judges there are no leaks, the diagnosis will be OK.
PBIB1026E
● Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close.
● Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent con-
trol valve.
● EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks
● EVAP purge line rubber tube bent
Evaporative emission ● EVAP system has a very small leak. ● Loose or disconnected rubber tube
P0456 control system very
0456 small leak (negative ● EVAP system does not operate prop- ● EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
pressure check) erly. ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve and the circuit
● O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is miss-
ing or damaged
● Fuel level sensor and the circuit
● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister purge vol-

CAUTION:
● Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, A
● Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement. EC
NOTE: C
● If DTC P0456 is displayed with P0442, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0456.
● After repair, make sure that the hoses and clips are installed properly.
● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait D
TESTING CONDITION:
● Open engine hood before conducting following procedure. E
● If any of following conditions are met just before the DTC confirmation procedure, leave the vehi-
cle for more than 1 hour.
– Fuel filler cap is removed. F
– Fuel is refilled or drained.
– EVAP component parts is/are removed.
● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. G
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. H
2. Make sure the following conditions are met.
FUEL LEVEL SE: 0.25 - 1.4V
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 32°C (32 - 90°F)
FUEL T/TMP SE: 0 - 35°C (32 - 95°F) I
INT A/TEMP SE: More than 0°C (32°F)
If NG, turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle) or refilling/draining
fuel until the output voltage condition of the “FUEL LEVEL SE” meets within the range above and leave J
the vehicle for more than 1 hour. Then start from step 1).
4. Select “EVAP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode K
with CONSULT-II.
L
PBIB0837E
5. Make sure that “OK” is displayed.

NOTE:
● If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on CONSULT-II screen, go
to EC-78, "Basic Inspection" .
● Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve properly.

Overall Function Check UBS00CM4
WITH GST
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EVAP very small leak function. During this check, a 1st
CAUTION:
● Do not use compressed air, doing so may damage the EVAP system.
● Do not start engine.
● Do not exceeded 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi).
1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP ser-
vice port.
BBIA0366E
2. Set the pressure pump and a hose.

3. Also set a vacuum gauge via 3-way connector and a hose.
5. Connect GST and select MODE 8.
6. Using mode 8 control the EVAP canister vent control valve
(close).
7. Apply pressure and make sure the following conditions are sat-
isfied.
Pressure to be applied: 2.7 kPa (20 mmHg, 0.79 inHg)
Time to be waited after the pressure drawn in to the EVAP SEF462UI
system and the pressure to be dropped: 60 seconds and
the pressure should not be dropped more than 0.4 kPa (3 mmHg, 0.12 inHg).
8. Disconnect GST.
11. Restart engine and let it idle for 90 seconds.
12. Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm for 30 seconds.
NOTE:
For more information, refer to GST instruction manual.

1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN A

2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design. EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap. C
SEF915U
E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. G
H
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
J
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one. L

5. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP

sure pump to EVAP service port securely. For the location of EVAP
service port, refer to EC-604, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE
DRAWING" .
BBIA0366E
SEF916U
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking.


With CONSULT-II
EC
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
C
NOTE:
● Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pres- D

sure in the system.
PEF917U
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak F
. G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace. H
SEF200U
I


Without CONSULT-II
BBIA0403E
NOTE:
●
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
SEF200U

● EVAP canister vent control valve.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

9. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER A

attached.
2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister? EC
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 10.
No (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12. C
No (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13.
BBIA0351E E

F
attached.
OK or NG G
NG >> GO TO 11. H

I
● EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection J

K
With CONSULT-II
L
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. M
2,000 rpm.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14.
PBIB1678E

Without CONSULT-II
2. Stop engine.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 14.

Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-23, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.

Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.

>> GO TO 20.

20. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE A

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 21.
C
Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and
improper connection. D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 22.
NG >> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube. E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 23. G
23. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR H

Refer to DI-22, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 24. I

K
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR PFP:25060
Component Description UBS00CM6
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to
the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level
sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is vari-
able resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on
the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
BBIA0402E
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CM7
NOTE:
If DTC P0460 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
When the vehicle is parked, naturally the fuel level in the fuel tank is stable. It means that output signal of the
fuel level sensor does not change. If ECM senses sloshing signal from the sensor, fuel level sensor malfunc-
tion is detected.
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
Even though the vehicle is parked, a signal
P0460 Fuel level sensor circuit ● Harness or connectors
being varied is sent from the fuel level sensor
0460 noise (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
to ECM.
● Ccombination meter
● Fuel level sensor
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Start engine and wait maximum of 2 consecutive minutes.
.
SEF195Y
WITH GST


OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 2.
C
D
>> INSPECTION END

Removal and Installation UBS00CMA E
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
F

DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR PFP:25060
Component Description UBS00CMB
BBIA0402E
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CMC
NOTE:
Driving long distances naturally affect fuel gauge level.
This diagnosis detects the fuel gauge malfunction of the gauge not moving even after a long distance has
been driven.
The output signal of the fuel level sensor shorted)
P0461 Fuel level sensor circuit does not change within the specified range ● Harness or connectors
0461 range/performance even though the vehicle has been driven a (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
long distance.
● Combination meter
Overall Function Check UBS00CMD
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the fuel level sensor function. During this check, a 1st trip
DTC might not be confirmed.
WARNING:
When performing following procedure, be sure to observe the handling of the fuel. Refer to FL-10,
"FUEL TANK" .
TESTING CONDITION:
Before starting overall function check, preparation of draining fuel and refilling fuel is required.
WITH CONSULT-II
NOTE:
Start from step 10, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/
8 Imp gal) in advance.
1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose.
2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to EC-45, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit.
4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds then turn ON.
6. Select “FUEL LEVEL SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

7. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it.

8. Select “FUEL PUMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT- A
II.
9. Touch “ON” and drain fuel approximately 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-
5/8 Imp gal) and stop it. EC
10. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it.
11. Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal).
12. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it. C
13. Confirm whether the voltage changes more than 0.03V during
step 7 to 10 and 10 to 12. SEF195Y
If NG, go to EC-335, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D
WITH GST
NOTE: E
Start from step 8, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8
Imp gal) in advance.
1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose.
F
2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-45, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit.
4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed. G
6. Drain fuel by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) from the fuel tank using proper equipment.
7. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies. H
8. Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal).
9. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies.
I
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CME
1. CHECK DTC WITH COMBINATION METER J

OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 2.
L
M
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation UBS00CMF
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR


DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT
DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT PFP:25060
Component Description UBS00CMG
BBIA0402E
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CMH
NOTE:
This diagnosis indicates the former, to detect open or short circuit malfunction.
P0462 Fuel level sensor circuit An excessively low voltage from the sensor is ● Harness or connectors
0462 low input sent to ECM. (The CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
P0463 Fuel level sensor circuit An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
0463 high input sent to ECM. ● Combination meter
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CMI
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at ignition
switch ON.
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF195Y
WITH GST

DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CMJ

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 2.
C
D
>> INSPECTION END

Removal and Installation UBS00CMK E
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
F

DTC P0500 VSS
DTC P0500 VSS PFP:32702
Description UBS00CML
NOTE:
U1001. Refere to EC-133, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the “ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit)” by CAN communication line. The c combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM by CAN commu-
nication line.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CMM
shorted)
The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from ● Harness or connectors
P0500 (The vehicle speed signal circuit is open or
Vehicle speed sensor vehicle speed sensor is sent to ECM
0500 shorted)
even when vehicle is being driven.
● Wheel sensor
● ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CMN
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Steps 1 and 2 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a
road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine (VDC switch OFF).
2. Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. The vehicle speed on CONSULT-
II should exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position.
4. Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.
onds.
COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F)
B/FUEL SCHDL More than 6.9 msec
Selector lever Except P or N position
PW/ST SIGNAL OFF
. SEF196Y
Overall Function Check UBS00CMO
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle speed sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st
WITH GST
1. Lift up drive wheels.
DTC P0500 VSS
2. Start engine.
3. Read vehicle speed sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST. A
The vehicle speed sensor on GST should be able to exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with
suitable gear position.
4. If NG, go to EC-339, "Diagnostic Procedure" . EC
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CMP
1. CHECK DTC WITH ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) C
Refer to BRC-11, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
OK or NG
D
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK DTC WITH COMBINATION METER E

F
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM
DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM PFP:23781
Description UBS00CMQ
NOTE:
If DTC P0506 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC.
The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let
into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is
varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects
the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM.
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value
memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily.
The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions,
such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan
operation, etc.).
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CMR
P0506 Idle speed control system The idle speed is less than the target idle ● Electric throttle control actuator
0506 RPM lower than expected speed by 100 rpm or more. ● Intake air leak
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CMS
NOTE:
● If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform EC-43, "Idle Air Volume Learning" ,
before conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure. For the target idle speed, refer to the EC-619,
"SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)" .
TESTING CONDITION:
● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
● Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
WITH CONSULT-II
4. Turn ignition switch ON again and select “DATA MONITOR”
5. Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed.
.
SEF174Y
WITH GST

Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CMT
1. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK A

2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Discover air leak location and repair. C
2. REPLACE ECM
D
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace ECM.
3. Perform initialization of NVIS(NATS) system and registration of all NVIS(NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to E
5. Perform EC-43, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . F
>> INSPECTION END G

DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM PFP:23781
Description UBS00CMU
NOTE:
If DTC P0507 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC.
The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let
into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is
varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects
the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM.
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value
memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily.
The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions,
such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan
operation, etc.).
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CMV
● Electric throttle control actuator
P0507 Idle speed control system The idle speed is more than the target idle
● Intake air leak
0507 RPM higher than expected speed by 200 rpm or more.
● PCV system
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CMW
NOTE:
● If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform EC-43, "Idle Air Volume Learning" ,
before conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure. For the target idle speed, refer to the EC-619,
"SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)" .
TESTING CONDITION:
● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
● Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
WITH CONSULT-II
4. Turn ignition switch ON again and select “DATA MONITOR”
5. Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed.
.
SEF174Y
WITH GST

Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CMX
1. CHECK PCV HOSE CONNECTION A
Confirm that PCV hose is connected correctly.

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 2.
C
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK
D
2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. E
NG >> Discover air leak location and repair.
3. REPLACE ECM
F
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace ECM.
3. Perform initialization of NVIS(NATS) system and registration of all NVIS(NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to G
5. Perform EC-43, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . H
I
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR PFP:49763
Component Description UBS00CMY
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power

steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This
sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load
into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the
throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and
adjusts the idle speed for the increased load.
BBIA0365E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CMZ

Steering wheel is in neutral position.
● Engine: After warming up, idle OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL (Forward direction)
the engine
Steering wheel is turned. ON
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CN0
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.

NOTE:
If DTC P0550 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to
EC-422, "DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY" .
P0550 Power steering pressure An excessively low or high voltage from the (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
0550 sensor circuit sensor is sent to ECM.
● Power steering pressure sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CN1
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST

Wiring Diagram UBS00CN2
EC
BBWA1176E

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
0.5 - 4.5V
Power steering pressure ● Steering wheel is being turned.
12 R
sensor [Engine is running]
0.4 - 0.8V
● Steering wheel is not being turned.
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
sensor)
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CN3

BBIA0354E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK PSP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

1. Disconnect PSP sensor harness connector.
EC
D
BBIA0365E
3. Check voltage between PSP sensor terminal 1 and ground with E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair harness or connectors.
G
PBIB0188E H
3. CHECK PSP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check harness continuity between PSP sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67.

4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power. K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L
4. CHECK PSP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
M
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 12 and PSP sensor terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK PSP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace PSP sensor.


>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00CN4
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR

3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 12 and ground under the
Condition Voltage
Steering wheel is being turned. 0.5 - 4.5V
Steering wheel is not being turned. 0.4 - 0.8V
MBIB0126E
Removal and Installation UBS00EM4
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR

Refer to PS-30, "HYDRAULIC LINE" .

DTC P0605 ECM
DTC P0605 ECM PFP:23710

A
Component Description UBS00CN5
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal

input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine. EC
PBIB1164E
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CN6
This self-diagnosis has one or two trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause F
A) ECM calculation function is malfunctioning.
P0605
Engine control module B) ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning. ● ECM
0605 G
C) ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning.
FAIL-SAFE MODE H
ECM enters fail-safe mode when the malfunction A is detected.
Detected items Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
I
● ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx.
Malfunction A 5 degrees) by the return spring.
● ECM deactivates ASCD operation.
J
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CN7
Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. If there is no malfunction on PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION K
B, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
NOTE:
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
With CONSULT-II M
.
SEF058Y
With GST

DTC P0605 ECM

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn
ON.
.
SEF058Y
With GST
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
With CONSULT-II
ON.
4. Repeat step 3 for 32 times.
.
SEF058Y
With GST
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CN8
1. INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-349, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
With GST
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> INSPECTION END

DTC P0605 ECM
2. REPLACE ECM A
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NVIS(NATS) system and registration of all NVIS(NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-127, "ECM Re-communicating Function" . EC
5. Perform EC-43, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . C
>> INSPECTION END

D

DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER PFP:22693
Description UBS00CN9
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Air fuel ratio (A/F)
Engine speed
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) sensor 1 heater Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air control
The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the A/F sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine operating
condition to keep the temperature of A/F sensor 1 element at the specified range.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CNA

A/F S1 HTR (B1)
● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine 0 - 100%
A/F S1 HTR (B2)
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CNB
P1031 The current amperage in the heated air fuel ratio
1031 (A/F) sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal ● Harness or connectors
(Bank 1) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor (The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is
range.
1 heater control circuit open or shorted.)
P1051 (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM
low
1051 through the heated air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● A/F sensor 1 heater
(Bank 2) heater.)
P1032 The current amperage in the heated air fuel ratio

1032 (A/F) sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal ● Harness or connectors
(Bank 1) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor (The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is
range.
1 heater control circuit shorted.)
P1052 (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM
high
1052 through the heated air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● A/F sensor 1 heater
(Bank 2) heater.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CNC
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at
idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST

Wiring Diagram UBS00CND
BANK 1 A
EC
BBWA1370E

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
2 O/B ● Warm-up condition
(Bank 1)
● Idle speed
PBIB1584E

BANK 2
A
EC
BBWA1201E

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
24 BR/W ● Warm-up condition
(Bank 2)
● Idle speed
PBIB1584E
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CNE

BBIA0354E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

1. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.
EC
BBIA0376E
2. Turn ignition switch ON. E

3. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. G
NG >> GO TO 3.
H
PBIB1683E
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I

● Harness connectors E5, F14 J
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse K
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

L
4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. M
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 2 (bank 1) or 24 (bank 2) and A/F sensor 1 terminal 4.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace A/F sensor 1.


Perform EC-125, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1.
Component Inspection UBS00CNF
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER

Check resistance between terminals 3 and 4.
Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3Ω at 25°C (77°F)
Check continuity between terminals 3 and 1, 2, 5, 6, terminals 4 and
1, 2, 5, 6.
If NG, replace the A/F sensor 1.
CAUTION:
● Discard any A/F sensor which has been dropped from a
height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such
as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new A/F sensor, clean exhaust system
threads using Heated Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
PBIB1684E
Removal and Installation UBS00CNG
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1


DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY PFP:23710

A
Component Description UBS00CNH
Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch
is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the EC
air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the idle air vol-
ume learning value memory, etc.
C
PBIB1164E
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CNI
F
P1065 ECM back-up RAM system does not function [ECM power supply (back-up) circuit is
ECM power supply circuit open or shorted.]
1065 properly.
● ECM G
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CNJ
NOTE: H
WITH CONSULT-II I
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. J
ON.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for 4 times. K
.
L
SEF058Y
M
WITH GST

Wiring Diagram UBS00CNK
BBWA1177E

CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Power supply for ECM BATTERY VOLTAGE C
121 W [Ignition switch: OFF]
(Back-up) (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CNL

D
1. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. G
NG >> GO TO 2.
H
MBIB0026E

● IPDM E/R connector E121 J
● 20A fuse
● Harness for open or short between ECM and battery
K
3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT L

OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 4.

4. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
With GST
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5.
No >> INSPECTION END
5. REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NVIS(NATS) system and registration of all NVIS(NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR PFP:16119

A
Component Description UBS00CNM
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. EC
The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throt-
tle valve and feeds the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle
valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening
angle properly in response to driving condition. C
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CNN
This self-diagnosis has one trip detection logic. D
Electric throttle control actuator does not func- E
A) tion properly due to the return spring malfunc-
tion.
P1121 Electric throttle control
1121 actuator Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is
B) F
not in specified range.
C) ECM detect the throttle valve is stuck open.
G
FAIL-SAFE MODE
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode H
The ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position.
Malfunction A
The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
Malfunction B ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less. I
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls.
Malfunction C
The engine can restart in N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more.
J
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CNO
NOTE:
● Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B first. If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform K
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. L
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. M
3. Shift selector lever to D position and wait at least 2 seconds.
4. Shift selector lever to P position.
8. Shift selector lever to P position.
ON.
SEF058Y
With GST

DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C

With CONSULT-II
4. Shift selector lever to N, P position.
5. Start engine and let it idle for 3 seconds.
SEF058Y
With GST
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CNP
1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY

1. Remove the intake air duct.
2. Check if a foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve
and the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.
BBIA0364E

>> INSPECTION END

DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION PFP:16119

A
Description UBS00CNQ
NOTE:
If DTC P1122 is displayed with DTC P1121 or 1126, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1121 or EC
P1126. Refer to EC-363 or EC-371 .
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed- C
back to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in
response to driving condition.
D
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CNR

E
P1122 Electric throttle control Electric throttle control function does not oper- (Throttle control motor circuit is open or
1122 performance problem ate properly. shorted) F
FAIL-SAFE MODE G
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
H
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CNS I

NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. J
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V when engine
is running.
K
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. L
M
SEF058Y
WITH GST

Wiring Diagram UBS00CNT
BBWA1178E

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
0 - 14V D
Throttle control motor ● Engine stopped
4 L/W E
(Close) ● Shift lever: D
PBIB1104E F
0 - 14V

G
5 L/B
(Open) ● Shift lever: D
● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed H
PBIB1105E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch: OFF] I
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) J
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CNU
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS K

L
BBIA0354E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I

following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester.
Ignition switch Voltage
OFF Approximately 0V
Battery voltage
ON
(11 - 14V)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 3. MBIB0028E
3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II

4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 6.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R
5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB1171E

6. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II A

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 104 and IPDM E/R terminal 47. EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. D
7. CHECK FUSE E
1. Disconnect 20A fuse.
2. Check 20A fuse for blown.
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
G
Refer to EC-125, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . H
OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-17, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MOD-
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" . I
9. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT J
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. K
L
Electric throttle control
ECM terminal Continuity
actuator terminal
5 Should not exist M
5
4 Should exist
5 Should exist PBIB1480E
6
4 Should not exist

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.

10. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY

1. Remove the intake air duct.
2. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and
the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
control actuator inside.
BBIA0364E
11. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 13.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00CNV
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

2. Check resistance between terminals 5 and 6.
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)]
3. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next
step.
PBIB2066E
Remove and Installation UBS00CNW


DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY PFP:16119

A
Component Description UBS00CNX
Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle
control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends EC
an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition
switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not
provided to the ECM.
C
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CNY

D
THRTL RELAY ● Ignition switch: ON ON
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CNZ

E

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause F
P1124 Throttle control motor ECM detect the throttle control motor relay is (Throttle control motor relay circuit is
1124 relay circuit short stuck ON. shorted) G
● Throttle control motor relay
P1126 Throttle control motor ECM detects a voltage of power source for (Throttle control motor relay circuit is H
1126 relay circuit open throttle control motor is excessively low. open)
● Throttle control motor relay
I
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MlL lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode J
spring.
K
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CO0
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION: M
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V when engine
is running.
With CONSULT-II
SEF058Y

With GST
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “DATA MONITOR””mode with CONSULT-II.
SEF058Y
With GST

Wiring Diagram UBS00CO1
EC
BBWA1179E

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CO2
1. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB1171E
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

3. Check continuity between ECM terminal 104 and IPDM E/R terminal 47.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK FUSE
2. Check 20A fuse for blown.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

4. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I A

following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester.
EC
Ignition switch Voltage
OFF Approximately 0V
Battery voltage C
ON
(11 - 14V)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. D
NG >> GO TO 5. MBIB0028E
5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II E

F
4. Check continuity between ECM terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 6.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. G
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
I
Check the following. J
● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R
K
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT L

OK or NG M
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .

DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR PFP:16119
Component Description UBS00CO3
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed-
back to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in
response to driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CO4

P1128 Throttle control motor ECM detects short in both circuits between (Throttle control motor circuit is shorted.)
1128 circuit short ECM and throttle control motor. ● Electric throttle control actuator
(Throttle control motor)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CO5
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST

Wiring Diagram UBS00CO6
EC
BBWA1180E

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0 - 14V

4 L/W
(Close) ● Shift lever: D
PBIB1104E
0 - 14V

5 L/B
(Open) ● Shift lever: D
PBIB1105E
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CO7

BBIA0354E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT A
3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. EC
ECM terminal Continuity C
actuator terminal
5 Should not exist
5
4 Should exist D
5 Should exist BBIA0371E
6
4 Should not exist
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
F
3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. H
NG >> GO TO 5.
4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT I

OK or NG
J
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR K

2. Perform EC-43, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . L
>> INSPECTION END M
Component Inspection UBS00CO8
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

2. Check resistance between terminals 5 and 6.
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)]
3. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next
step.
PBIB2066E

Removal and Installation UBS00CO9


DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 PFP:226A0

A
Component Description UBS00COA

monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. EC
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates volt- C
tions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for D
SEF327R
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00COB

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION F
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for quickly. G
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00COC

H

gen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the I
sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the minimum voltage of sensor is
sufficiently low during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut. J
SEF558Z
L
1146 M
(Bank 1) Heated oxygen sensor
The minimum voltage from the sensor is not ● Heated oxygen sensor 2
2 minimum voltage
P1166 reached to the specified voltage.
monitoring ● Fuel pressure
1166
(Bank 2) ● Injectors

DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00COD
NOTE:
If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
CONSULT-II.
ture.
(158°F). SEF174Y
CONSULT-II.
PBIB0818E
Overall Function Check UBS00COE
WITH GST
engine ground.

DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2

The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this
procedure.
EC
essary.
position.
procedure. D

DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
Wiring Diagram UBS00COF
BANK 1
BBWA1158E

DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

(bank 1) D
E

DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
BANK 2
BBWA1159E

DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

(bank 2) D
E
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00COG

F
G
BBIA0354E J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. K

DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA

With CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected?
SEF968Y
Without CONSULT-II
nector.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected? BBIA0368E
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-215 .
No >> GO TO 3.

DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

EC
BBIA0435E
E
F
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
H
I
● Harness for open or short between HO2S2 and body ground
J

DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
5. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P1146 55 1 1
P1166 74 1 2

Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P1146 55 1 1
P1166 74 1 2

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00COH

With CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
ture.
SEF174Y

DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2

“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. A
EC
PBIB1672E
D
PBIB1210E
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.70V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. H
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 I
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. J
Without CONSULT-II
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. K
L
engine ground.
at least 10 times. M
procedure.
sary.
position.
procedure.
CAUTION:

DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
Removal and Installation UBS00COI


DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 PFP:226A0

A
Component Description UBS00COJ

monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. EC
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates volt- C
tions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for D
SEF327R
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00COK

between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for quickly. G
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00COL

H

gen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the I
sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of the sensor
is sufficiently high during the various driving condition such as fuel- J
cut.
SEF559Z
L
1147 (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) M
(Bank 1) Heated oxygen sensor ● Heated oxygen sensor 2
The maximum voltage from the sensor is not
2 maximum voltage
P1167 reached to the specified voltage. ● Fuel pressure
monitoring
1167 ● Injectors

DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00COM
NOTE:
If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
CONSULT-II.
ture.
(158°F). SEF174Y
CONSULT-II.
PBIB0819E
Overall Function Check UBS00CON
WITH GST
engine ground.

DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2

procedure.
EC
essary.
position.
The voltage should be above 0.70V at least once during this PBIB2054E
procedure. D

DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
Wiring Diagram UBS00COO
BANK 1
BBWA1158E

DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

(bank 1) D
E

DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
BANK 2
BBWA1159E

DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

(bank 2) D
E
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00COP

F
G
BBIA0354E J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. K

DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2

With CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
SEF968Y
Without CONSULT-II
nector.
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171or P0174. Refer to EC-206 .
No >> GO TO 3.

DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

EC
BBIA0435E
E
F
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
H
I
● Harness for open or short between HO2S2 and body ground
J

DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
5. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P1147 55 1 1
P1167 74 1 2

Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P1147 55 1 1
P1167 74 1 2

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00COQ

With CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
ture.
SEF174Y

DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2

“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. A
EC
PBIB1672E
D
PBIB1210E
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.70V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. H
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 018V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 I
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. J
Without CONSULT-II
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. K
L
engine ground.
at least 10 times. M
procedure.
sary.
position.
procedure.
CAUTION:

DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
Removal and Installation UBS00COR


DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL
DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL PFP:22690

A
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00COS

EC
P1148 The closed loop control function for bank 1
1148 does not operate even when vehicle is driving
[The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit is C
(Bank 1) Closed loop control in the specified condition.
open or shorted.]
P1168 function The closed loop control function for bank 2 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
1168 does not operate even when vehicle is driving
● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
(Bank 2) in the specified condition. D
DTC P1148 or P1168 is displayed with another DTC for air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
Perform the trouble diagnosis for the corresponding DTC.
E

DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT
DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT PFP:47850
Description UBS00COT
The malfunction information related to TCS is transferred through the CAN communication line from “ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit)” to ECM.
Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for “ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)” but also for ECM after TCS related repair.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00COU
Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis. The MIL will not light up for this self-
diagnosis.
● ABS actuator and electric unit (control
P1211 ECM receives a malfunction information from unit)
TCS control unit
1211 “ABS actuator electric unit (control unit)”
● TCS related parts
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00COV
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00COW
Go to BRC-11, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .

DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE
DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE PFP:47850

A
Description UBS00COX
NOTE:
If DTC P1212 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, EC
This CAN communication line is used to control the smooth engine operation during the TCS operation. Pulse
signals are exchanged between ECM and “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)”.
Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for “ABS actuator and electric unit C
(control unit)” but also for ECM after TCS related repair.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00COY
D
Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis. The MIL will not light up for this self-
diagnosis.
E
ECM can not receive the information (The CAN communication line is open or
P1212 TCS communication shorted.) F
from “ABS actuator and electric unit (con-
1212 line
trol unit)” continuously. ● ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
● Dead (Weak) battery
G
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00COZ
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle. H
WITH CONSULT-II
I
4. If a 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-407, "Diagnostic Proce- J
dure" .
L
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. M
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CP0
1. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) FUNCTION

Refer to BRC-11, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE PFP:00000
Description UBS00CP1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NOTE:
Cooling Fan Control
Wheel sensor*2 Vehicle speed Cooling fan IPDM E/R

control (Cooling fan relay)
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner ON signal*2
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure
*1: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: This signal is sent to ECM through CAN communication line.
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant
pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 2-step control [ON/OFF].
Cooling Fan Operation
PBIB2060E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CP2

OFF
● Engine: After warming up, idle (210°F) or less
COOLING FAN
the engine Engine coolant temperature is 100°C
ON
(212°F) or more

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CP3
A
If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will
rise.
When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is
indicated. EC
C
(The cooling fan circuit is open or
● Cooling fan does not operate properly (Over- shorted.)
heat). ● Cooling fan D
● Cooling fan system does not operate prop- ● Radiator hose
P1217 Engine over tempera- erly (Overheat).
● Radiator
1217 ture (Overheat) ● Engine coolant was not added to the system E
● Radiator cap
using the proper filling method.
● Water pump
● Engine coolant is not within the specified
range. ● Thermostat
For more information, refer to EC-417,
F
"Main 12 Causes of Overheating" .
CAUTION: G
When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to CO-9, "Changing Engine
Coolant" . Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to LU-8, "Changing Engine Oil" .
1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to
H
use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-12, "ANTI-FREEZE COOLANT MIXTURE
RATIO" .
2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted.
I
Overall Function Check UBS00CP4
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might not be con-
firmed. J
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pres-
sure fluid escaping from the radiator. K
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up
pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.
WITH CONSULT-II L
1. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below M
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-413,
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-413,
SEF621W

4. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-

SULT-II.
5. If the results are NG, go to EC-413, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF646X
WITH GST
1. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-413,
2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-413,
3. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connec-
tor.
4. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor SEF621W
harness connector.
5. Start engine and make sure that cooling fan operates at higher
speed than low speed.
Be careful not to overheat engine.
SEF882V

Wiring Diagram UBS00CP5
EC
BBWA1181E

BBWA1182E

Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CP6
1. INSPECTION START A
Do you have CONSULT-II?

Yes or No EC
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.
C
2. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR OPERATION
With CONSULT-II D
2. Select “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SULT-II. E
3. Make sure that cooling fan operates.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. F
NG >> Check cooling fan control circuit. (Go to EC-416, "PRO-
CEDURE A" .)
G
SEF646X
H
3. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II I
1. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
2. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
3. Start engine and let it idle. J
4. Make sure that cooling fan operates.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. K
NG >> Check cooling fan control circuit. (Go to EC-416, "PRO-
CEDURE A" .)
L
M
SEF882V

4. CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK

Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the
pressure drops.
Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2 , 23 psi)
CAUTION:
Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage.
Pressure should not drop.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Check the following for leak. Refer to CO-9, "CHECK-
ING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS" . PBIC1528E
● Hose
● Radiator
● Water pump
5. CHECK RADIATOR CAP

Apply pressure to cap with a tester.
Radiator cap relief 59 - 98 kPa (0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2
pressure: , 9 - 14 psi)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace radiator cap.
SLC755A
6. CHECK THERMOSTAT
1. Check valve seating condition at normal room temperatures.
It should seat tightly.
2. Check valve opening temperature and valve lift.
Valve opening temperature: 82°C (180°F) [standard]
Valve lift: More than 10.0 mm/95°C
(0.394 in/203°F)
3. Check if valve is closed at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening tem-
perature.
For details, refer to CO-17, "THERMOSTAT AND WATER PIP-
ING" .
OK or NG
SLC343
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace thermostat

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

8. CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES A

If the cause cannot be isolated, go to EC-417, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating" .
>> INSPECTION END EC

PROCEDURE A
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 24 and ground with
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
WBIA0532E

● 40A fusible link
● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and battery
3. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT

1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between cooling fan motor terminal 1
and IPDM E/R terminal 24, cooling fan motor terminal 2 and
body ground.
Refer to wiring diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
BBIA0363E
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace cooling fan motor.

OK or NG
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG >> Repair or replace harness connectors.

Main 12 Causes of Overheating UBS00CP7
A
Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Standard Reference page
OFF 1 ● Blocked radiator ● Visual No blocking —
● Blocked condenser EC
● Blocked radiator grille
● Blocked bumper
2 ● Coolant mixture ● Coolant tester 50 - 50% coolant mixture MA-11, "RECOM- C
MENDED FLUIDS AND
LUBRICANTS"
3 ● Coolant level ● Visual Coolant up to MAX level CO-9, "Changing Engine D
in reservoir tank and radi- Coolant"
ator filler neck
4 ● Radiator cap ● Pressure tester 59 - 98 kPa CO-12, "Checking Reser-
E
(0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2 , 9 - 14 voir Cap"
psi) (Limit)
ON*2 5 ● Coolant leaks ● Visual No leaks CO-9, "CHECKING

COOLING SYSTEM FOR F
LEAKS"
ON*2 6 ● Thermostat ● Touch the upper and Both hoses should be hot CO-17, "THERMOSTAT
lower radiator hoses AND WATER PIPING" G
ON*1 7 ● Cooling fan ● CONSULT-II Operating See trouble diagnosis for
DTC P1217 (EC-408 ).
OFF 8 ● Combustion gas leak ● Color checker chemical Negative — H
tester 4 Gas analyzer
ON*3 9 ● Coolant temperature ● Visual Gauge less than 3/4 —

gauge when driving I
● Coolant overflow to ● Visual No overflow during driving CO-9, "Changing Engine
reservoir tank and idling Coolant"
OFF*4 10 ● Coolant return from ● Visual Should be initial level in CO-9, "Changing Engine J
reservoir tank to radia- reservoir tank Coolant"
tor
OFF 11 ● Cylinder head ● Straight gauge feeler 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi- EM-64, "Inspection After K
gauge mum distortion (warping) Disassembly"
12 ● Cylinder block and pis- ● Visual No scuffing on cylinder EM-90, "Inspection After
tons walls or piston Disassembly"
L
*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.
*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time. M
For more information, refer to CO-5, "OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS" .
Component Inspection UBS00CP8
COOLING FAN MOTOR

1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector.
2. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and
check operation.
Cooling fan motor should operate.
If NG, replace cooling fan motor.
WBIA0533E

DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR PFP:16119
Component Description UBS00CP9

PBIB0145E
tion.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CPA

Closed throttle position
P1225 Closed throttle position learning value is exces- ● Electric throttle control actuator
learning performance
1225 sively low. (TP sensor 1 and 2)
problem
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CPB
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST

DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CPC
1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY A

2. Remove the intake air duct. EC
the housing.
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 2.
control actuator inside. D
E
BBIA0364E
2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR F

2. Perform EC-43, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . G
>> INSPECTION END H
Removal and Installation UBS00CPD

I

DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
Component Description UBS00CPE

PBIB0145E
tion.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CPF

Closed throttle position
P1226 Closed throttle position learning is not per- ● Electric throttle control actuator
learning performance
1226 formed successfully, repeatedly. (TP sensor 1 and 2)
problem
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CPG
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for 32 times.
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST

DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CPH
1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY A

2. Remove the intake air duct. EC
the housing.
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 2.
control actuator inside. D
E
BBIA0364E
2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR F

2. Perform EC-43, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . G
>> INSPECTION END H
Removal and Installation UBS00CPI

I

DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY PFP:16119
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CPJ

(APP sensor 1 circuit is shorted.)
(PSP sensor circuit is shorted.)
(Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is
shorted.)
P1229 Sensor power supply circuit ECM detects a voltage of power source (EVAP control system pressure sensor circuit
1229 short for sensor is excessively low or high. is shorted.)
● Power steering pressure sensor
● Refrigerant pressure sensor
FAIL-SAFE MODE
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CPK
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST

Wiring Diagram UBS00CPL
EC
BBWA1183E

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
48 SB (EVAP control system [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
pressure sensor)
Sensor power supply
49 R/Y (Refrigerant pressure [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sensor)
Sensor power supply
sensor)
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CPM

BBIA0354E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness
connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. EC
D
BBIA0361E
3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 7 and ground with E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3.
G
PBIB2070E H
3. CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS

Check the following. I
● Harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals
ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram J
48 EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 EC-302
49 Refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 EC-586
K
68 Power steering pressure sensor terminal 1 EC-345
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 4.
M
4. CHECK COMPONENTS
● EVAP control system pressure sensor (Refer to EC-305, "Component Inspection" .)
● Power steering pressure sensor (Refer to EC-348, "Component Inspection" .)
● Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to ATC-107, "COMPONENT INSPECTION" , or MTC-97, "COMPO-
NENT INSPECTION" .)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning components.
5. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEEDAL POSITION SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

1. Replace accelerator pedal position assembly.
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1
DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1 PFP:22693

A
Component Description UBS00CPN
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sen-
sor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a EC
Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell,
which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
C
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the D
electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where
they are brought to thermodynamic balance. SEF579Z
E
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygen-
pump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to F
indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater
is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating tempera-
ture of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
G
H
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CPO

I
J
A/F SEN1 (B1) Maintaining engine speed at
● Engine: After warming up Fluctuates around 1.5V
A/F SEN1 (B2) 2,000 rpm
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CPP

K
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1
signal is not inordinately low.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible Cause L
P1271
(Bank 1) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● The A/F signal computed by ECM from the (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or M
P1281 circuit no activity detected A/F sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 0V. shorted.)
1281 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
(Bank 2)
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CPQ
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” indication.

If the indication is constantly approx. 0V, go to EC-432, "Diag-
nostic Procedure" .
If the indication is not constantly approx. 0V, go to next step.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then
restart engine.
5. Drive and accelerate vehicle to more than 40 km/h (25 MPH)
within 20 seconds after restarting engine.
6. Maintain the following conditions for about 20 consecutive sec-
onds.
SEF581Z
ENG SPEED 1,000 - 3,200 rpm

VHCL SPEED SE More than 40 km/h (25 MPH)
Gear position Suitable position
NOTE:
● Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.
● If this procedure is not completed within 1 minute after restarting engine at step 4, return to step
4.
7. If 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-432, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST

Wiring Diagram UBS00CPR
BANK 1 A
EC
BBWA1369E

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1) ● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed

BANK 2
A
EC
BBWA0919E

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
57 L/P Approximately 2.6V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CPS

BBIA0354E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.


EC
BBIA0376E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. G
NG >> GO TO 3.
H
PBIB1683E

● 10A fuse

L

3. Check harness continuity between A/F sensor 1 terminal and ECM terminal as follows.
A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal
1 16
2 75
Bank1
5 35
6 56
1 76
2 77
Bank 2
5 57
6 58

Bank 1 Bank 2
1 16 1 76
2 75 2 77
5 35 5 57
6 56 6 58

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
Removal and Installation UBS00CPT



A
Component Description UBS00CPU
C
< air).
E
ture of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
G
H
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CPV

I
J
A/F SEN1 (B2) 2,000 rpm
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CPW

K
signal is not inordinately high.
P1272
(Bank 1) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or M
P1282 circuit no activity detected sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 5V. shorted.)
1282 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
(Bank 2)
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CPX
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II


If the indication is constantly approx. 5V, go to EC-440, "Diag-
nostic Procedure" .
If the indication is not constantly approx. 5V, go to next step.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then
restart engine.
5. Drive and accelerate vehicle to more than 40 km/h (25 MPH)
within 20 seconds after restarting engine.
6. Maintain the following conditions for about 20 consecutive sec-
onds.
SEF581Z
ENG SPEED 1,000 - 3,200 rpm

Gear position Suitable position
NOTE:
● Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.
● If this procedure is not completed within 1 minute after restarting engine at step 4, return to step
4.
7. If 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-440, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST

Wiring Diagram UBS00CPY
BANK 1 A
EC
BBWA1369E

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed

BANK 2
A
EC
BBWA0919E

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CPZ

BBIA0354E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.


EC
BBIA0376E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. G
NG >> GO TO 3.
H
PBIB1683E

● 10A fuse

L

1 16
2 75
Bank1
5 35
6 56
1 76
2 77
Bank 2
5 57
6 58

Bank 1 Bank 2
1 16 1 76
2 75 2 77
5 35 5 57
6 56 6 58

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
Removal and Installation UBS00CQ0



A
Component Description UBS00CQ1
C
< air).
E
ture of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
G
H
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CQ2

I
J
A/F SEN1 (B2) 2,000 rpm
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CQ3

K
To judge the malfunction, the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is monitored not to be
shifted LEAN side or RICH side.
P1273 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
1273
● The output voltage computed by ECM from the ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
(Bank 1) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 M
A/F sensor 1 signal is shifted to the lean side ● Fuel pressure
P1283 lean shift monitoring
for a specified period. ● Injectors
1283
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CQ4
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SULT-II.

4. Clear the self-learning coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.

4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load.
8. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 13 min-
utes.
.
SEF968Y
WITH GST
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
nector.
6. Select “MODE 3” with GST and make sure that DTC P0102 is
detected.
7. Select “MODE 4” with GST and erase the DTC P0102.
9. Let engine idle for 1 minute. BBIA0368E
utes.
11. Select “MODE 7” with GST.

Wiring Diagram UBS00CQ5
BANK 1 A
EC
BBWA1369E

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed

BANK 2
A
EC
BBWA0919E

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CQ6

BBIA0354E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. RETIGHTEN A/F SENSOR 1

Loosen and retighten the A/F sensor 1.
BBIA0375E
Tightening torque: 50 N-m (5.1 kg-m, 37 ft-lb)
>> GO TO 3.

3. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA A

With CONSULT-II
EC
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. C
D
SEF968Y
F
Without CONSULT-II
2. Turn ignition switch OFF. G
4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
H
nector.
I
8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. J

K
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171 or P0174. Refer to EC-206 .
No >> GO TO 4.
L

4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

BBIA0376E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB1683E

● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse

6. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
3. Check harness continuity between A/F sensor 1 terminal and ECM terminal as follows. EC
C
1 16
2 75
Bank1
5 35 D
6 56
1 76
E
2 77
Bank 2
5 57
6 58 F

4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. G
Bank 1 Bank 2
H
1 16 1 76
2 75 2 77 I
5 35 5 57
6 56 6 58
J
5. Also check harness for short to power. K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
Refer to EC-358, "Component Inspection" . M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

OK or NG
Removal and Installation UBS00CQ7


Component Description UBS00CQ8
sor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the

gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to
ture of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CQ9

A/F SEN1 (B2) 2,000 rpm
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CQA
To judge the malfunction, the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is monitored not to be
shifted to the LEAN side or RICH side.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible Cause
P1274 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
1274 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
(Bank 1) ● The A/F signal computed by ECM from the
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Fuel pressure
A/F sensor 1 signal is shifted to the rich side
P1284 rich shift monitoring
for a specified period. ● Injectors
1244
(Bank 2)
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CQB
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SULT-II.

4. Clear the self-learning coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.

5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. A
7. Let engine idle for 1 minute. EC
utes.
9. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-457, "Diagnostic Procedure" C
.
SEF968Y
D
WITH GST
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. E
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con- F
nector.
6. Select “MODE 3” with GST and make sure that DTC P0102 is
detected. G
7. Select “MODE 4” with GST and erase the DTC P0102.
4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load. H
9. Let engine idle for 1 minute. PBIB1077E
utes. I
J

Wiring Diagram UBS00CQC
BANK 1
BBWA1369E

CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
16 BR/R Approximately 3.1V C
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
D

BANK 2
BBWA0919E

CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
57 L/P Approximately 2.6V C
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
D
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CQD
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS E

2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. F
I
BBIA0354E

OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 2.
K
L
BBIA0375E
>> GO TO 3.

3. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA.

With CONSULT-II
SEF968Y
Without CONSULT-II
nector.

Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172 or P0175. Refer to EC-215 .
No >> GO TO 4.

4. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR A

EC
BBIA0376E
E
3. Check harness connector for water.
Water should not exit.
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 5.
G
5. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch ON. H
Voltage: Battery voltage I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6. J
K
PBIB1683E
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART L

● IPDM E/R harness connector E119 M
● 10A fuse

1 16
2 75
Bank1
5 35
6 56
1 76
2 77
Bank 2
5 57
6 58

Bank 1 Bank 2
1 16 1 76
2 75 2 77
5 35 5 57
6 56 6 58

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

OK or NG
Removal and Installation UBS00CQE



A
Component Description UBS00CQF
C
< air).
E
ture of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
G
H
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CQG

I
J
A/F SEN1 (B2) 2,000 rpm
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CQH

K
signal fluctuates according to fuel feedback control.
1276 (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or
(Bank 1) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F shorted.) M
P1286 circuit high voltage sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 1.5V. ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
1286
(Bank 2)
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CQI
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
If the indication is constantly approx. 1.5V and does not fluctuates, go to EC-467, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the indication fluctuates around 1.5V, go to next step.
4. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276” or “A/F SEN1 (B2) P1286” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
6. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis-
played on the CONSULT-II screen.
ENG SPEED 850 - 3,200 rpm
Vehicle speed More than 64 km/h (40 MPH)
Selector lever D position with “OD” ON
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 20 seconds, retry from

step 2.
SEF576Z
7. Release accelerator pedal fully.

NOTE:
SEF577Z
8. Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”.

If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, retry from
step 6.
9. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULT”.
If “NG” is displayed, go to EC-467, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF578Z
Overall Function Check UBS00CQJ
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the A/F sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a DTC might not
be confirmed.
WITH GST
2. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in the suitable gear position.
3. Set 5th position, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30
MPH).
NOTE:
5. Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF.
6. Wait at least 10 seconds and restart engine.


9. Make sure that no DTC is displayed. A
If the DTC is displayed, go to EC-467, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
EC

Wiring Diagram UBS00CQK
BANK 1
BBWA1369E

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. A
CAUTION:
EC
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
[Engine is running]
56 LG/B Approximately 2.3V D
● Idle speed

BANK 2
BBWA0919E

CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
57 L/P Approximately 2.6V C
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
D
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CQL
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS E

2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. F
I
BBIA0354E

OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 2.
K

2. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

BBIA0376E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB1683E

● 10A fuse

4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
3. Check harness continuity between A/F sensor 1 terminal and ECM terminal as follows. EC
C
1 16
2 75
Bank1
5 35 D
6 56
1 76
E
2 77
Bank 2
5 57
6 58 F

4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. G
Bank 1 Bank 2
H
1 16 1 76
2 75 2 77 I
5 35 5 57
6 56 6 58
J
5. Also check harness for short to power. K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
Perform EC-125, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . M
OK or NG
Removal and Installation UBS00CQM

Refer to .EM-19, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST"

Component Description UBS00CQN
< air).

ture of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CQO

A/F SEN1 (B2) 2,000 rpm
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CQP
To judge the malfunction of A/F sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of the A/F signal computed
by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel
feedback control constant, and the A/F sensor 1 temperature index. Judgment is based on whether the com-
pensated time (the A/F signal cycling time index) is inordinately long or not.
(Bank 1) shorted.)
● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
● The response (from RICH to LEAN) of the A/F
signal computed by ECM from A/F sensor 1
P1288 circuit slow response
signal takes more than the specified time. ● Injectors
1288
(Bank 2)
● Exhaust gas leaks
● PCV

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CQQ
A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
C
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load. D
5. Select “A/F SEN1(B1) P1278/P1279” or “A/F SEN1(B1) P1288/P1289” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK
SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. E
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step
10. F
If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-II screen, go to
the following step.
H
PBIB0756E
7. After perform the following procedure, “TESTING” will be dis- I

a. Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it
for 10 seconds.
J
b. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about
10 seconds.
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 10 seconds, refer to EC-
121, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . K
8. Wait for about 20 seconds at idle at under the condition that
“TESTING” is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen.
PBIB1925E L

If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, refer to M
EC-121, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
RESULT”.
PBIB0758E
WITH GST
3. Calculate the total value of “Short term fuel trim” and “Long term fuel trim” indications.
Make sure that the total percentage should be within ±15%.
If OK, go to the following step.
If NG, check the following.


● Incorrect fuel pressure
● Lack of fuel
● Injectors
● PCV valve

5. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load.
7. Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it for 10 seconds.
8. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 1 minute.
If the 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-476, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Wiring Diagram UBS00CQR
BANK 1 A
EC
BBWA1369E

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed

BANK 2
A
EC
BBWA0919E

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CQS

BBIA0354E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

BBIA0375E
>> GO TO 3.


2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (mnifold).
EC
PBIB1216E
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace. F

G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. H


With CONSULT-II
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”
or “START”.
SEF968Y
Without CONSULT-II
nector.

Yes or No
No >> GO TO 6.

6. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

EC
BBIA0376E
E
CONSULT-II or tester. F

OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
H
PBIB1683E
I
● 10A fuse K
L

1 16
2 75
Bank1
5 35
6 56
1 76
2 77
Bank 2
5 57
6 58

Bank 1 Bank 2
1 16 1 76
2 75 2 77
5 35 5 57
6 56 6 58

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
9. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.

11. CHECK PCV VALVE A

Refer to EC-615, "POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. EC
NG >> Repair or replace PCV valve.
12. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT C

OK or NG
D
Removal and Installation UBS00CQT E
F

Component Description UBS00CQU
< air).

ture of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
SEF580Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CQV

A/F SEN1 (B2) 2,000 rpm
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CQW
To judge the malfunction of A/F sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of the A/F signal computed
by ECM from the air fuel ration A/F sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed and
load), fuel feedback control constant, and the A/F sensor 1 temperature index. Judgment is based on whether
the compensated time (the A/F signal cycling time index) is inordinately long or not.
(Bank 1) shorted.)
● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
● The response (from LEAN to RICH) of the A/F
signal computed by ECM from A/F sensor 1
P1289 circuit slow response
signal takes more than the specified time. ● Injectors
1289
(Bank 2)
● PCV

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CQX
A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
C
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load. D
5. Select “A/F SEN1(B1) P1278/P1279” or “A/F SEN1(B1) P1288/P1289” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK
SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. E
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step
10. F
If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-II screen, go to
the following step.
H
PBIB0756E
7. After perform the following procedure, “TESTING” will be dis- I

for 10 seconds.
J
b. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about
10 seconds.
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 10 seconds, refer to EC-
121, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . K
8. Wait for about 20 seconds at idle at under the condition that
“TESTING” is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen.
PBIB1925E L

If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, refer to M
EC-121, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
RESULT”.
PBIB0758E
WITH GST
3. Calculate the total value of “Short term fuel trim” and “Long term fuel trim” indications.
Make sure that the total percentage should be within ±15%.
If OK, go to the following step.
If NG, check the following.


● Incorrect fuel pressure
● Lack of fuel
● Injectors
● PCV valve

5. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load.
7. Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it for 10 seconds.
8. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 1 minute.
If the 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-488, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Wiring Diagram UBS00CQY
BANK 1 A
EC
BBWA1369E

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed

BANK 2
A
EC
BBWA0919E

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CQZ

BBIA0354E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

BBIA0375E
>> GO TO 3.


2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (Manifold).
EC
PBIB1216E
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace. F

G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. H


With CONSULT-II
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”
or “START”.
SEF968Y
Without CONSULT-II
nector.

Yes or No
No >> GO TO 6.

6. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

EC
BBIA0376E
E

OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
H
PBIB1683E
I
● 10A fuse K
L

1 16
2 75
Bank1
5 35
6 56
1 76
2 77
Bank 2
5 57
6 58

Bank 1 Bank 2
1 16 1 76
2 75 2 77
5 35 5 57
6 56 6 58

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
9. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.

11. CHECK PCV VALVE A

Refer to EC-615, "POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. EC
NG >> Repair or replace PCV valve.
12. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT C

OK or NG
D
Removal and Installation UBS00CR0 E
F

DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

PFP:14920
Description UBS00CR1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

EVAP canister EVAP canister purge vol-
purge flow control ume control solenoid valve
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
A/F sensor 1
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank
2 Vehicle speed
Wheel sensor*
*1:ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass pas-
sage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is
determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor
from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes.
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canis-
ter. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse,
the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.
PBIB2057E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CR2

● Engine: After warming up Idle
● Shift lever: N
● No load 2,000 rpm —

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CR3
A
● EVAP canister purge volume control EC
solenoid valve
The canister purge flow is detected during the (The valve is stuck open.)
EVAP canister purge
P1444 specified driving conditions, even when EVAP
volume control solenoid ● EVAP canister vent control valve C
1444 canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
valve ● EVAP canister
completely closed.
● Hoses
(Hoses are connected incorrectly or
clogged.)
D
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CR4
NOTE: E
TESTING CONDITION: F
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. G
H
4. Select “PURG VOL CN/V P1444” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-II.
I
L
PBIB0839E
6. Start engine and let it idle until “TESTING” on CONSULT-II changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take
approximately 10 seconds.) M
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2.
7. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-
498, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST

Wiring Diagram UBS00CR5
BBWA0891E

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Idle speed
E
EVAP canister purge vol-

45 L/Y PBIB0050E
11 - 14V F
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More G
PBIB0051E H
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
● For a few seconds after turning ignition I
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than a few seconds after turning igni- J
(11 - 14V)
tion switch OFF
120 BR (11 - 14V) K

Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CR6
1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIR-
CUIT
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
harness connector.
BBIA0366E
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control

solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB0148E

● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM
3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIR-
CUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 45 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

4. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR A

EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. C
5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR D

OK or NG
E
F
With CONSULT-II G
3. Start engine. H
valve opening. I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7. J
K
PBIB1678E
7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE L

OK or NG
M
OK >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.


attached.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 11.
No >> GO TO 13.
BBIA0351E

attached.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 12.


>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00CR7
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A

With CONSULT-II
solenoid valve under the following conditions. EC
Condition Air passage continuity

(PURG VOL CONT/V value) between A and B
C
100.0% Yes
0.0% No
D
PBIB2058E
E
Without CONSULT-II
solenoid valve under the following conditions. F
Air passage continuity
Condition
between A and B
12V direct current supply between G
Yes
terminals 1 and 2
No supply No
H
PBIB2059E
Removal and Installation UBS00CR8

I
J

DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE PFP:14935
Component Description UBS00CR9
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canis-
ter and is used to seal the canister vent.
This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the
ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized.
A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal
the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative
emission control system components.
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains
opened.
When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evapo-
rative emission control system is depressurized and allows EVAP
PBIB1263E
Control System diagnosis.
BBIA0403E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CRA

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CRB
P1446 EVAP canister vent con- EVAP canister vent control valve remains and the circuit
1446 trol valve close closed under specified driving conditions. ● Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister
vent control valve

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CRC
A
NOTE:
EC
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. C
CONSULT-II.
4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 1 minute. D
5. Repeat next procedures 3 times.
for 2 minutes and 50 seconds to 3 minutes. E
Never exceed 3 minutes.
b. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for about
5 seconds. F
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-505, "Diagnostic Procedure" SEF058Y
.
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the next step.
G
7. Repeat next procedure 20 times.
a. Quickly increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 4,500 rpm or more and keep it for 25 to 30 seconds.
b. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for at least 35 seconds. H
K
PBIB0972E

L
WITH GST
M

Wiring Diagram UBS00CRD
BBWA1174E

CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
EVAP canister vent control BATTERY VOLTAGE C
valve (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CRE

D
1. CHECK RUBBER TUBE
2. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. E
H
BBIA0403E

I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Clean rubber tube using an air blower.
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. L

1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor M
attached.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 4.
No >> GO TO 6.
BBIA0351E


attached.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

6. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00CRF
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

With CONSULT-II
rusted.
3. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
PBIB1033E

5. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.

6. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time. A
Make sure that new O-ring is installed properly.
Condition VENT CONTROL/V Air passage continuity between A and B
EC
ON No
OFF Yes
Operation takes less than 1 second. C
If OK, go to next step. PBIB1679E
D
7. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
Without CONSULT-II E
rusted. F
PBIB1033E
I
3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the
Make sure that new O-ring is installed properly.
J
Condition Air passage continuity between A and B
No
terminals 1 and 2 K
OFF Yes
L
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. PBIB1034E

4. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. M

DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH PFP:25551
Component Description UBS00CRG
ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for

each button. ECM reads voltage variation of switch, and determines
which button is operated.
Refer to EC-617, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE
(ASCD)" for the ASCD function.
BBIA0362E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CRH

ON/OFF(MAIN) switch: Pressed ON
MAIN SW ● Ignition switch: ON
ON/OFF(MAIN) switch: Released OFF
CANCEL switch: Pressed ON
CANCEL SW ● Ignition switch: ON
CANCEL switch: Released OFF
ACCEL/RESUME switch: Pressed ON
RESUME/ACC SW ● Ignition switch: ON
ACCEL/RESUME switch: Released OFF
COAST/SET switch: Pressed ON
SET SW ● Ignition switch: ON
COAST/SET switch: Released OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CRI

NOTE:
EC-349, "DTC P0605 ECM" .
● An excessively high voltage signal from the
ASCD steering switch is sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors
P1564 ● ECM detects that input signal from the ASCD (The switch circuit is open or shorted.)
ASCD steering switch
1564 steering switch is out of the specified range. ● ASCD steering switch
● ECM detects that the ASCD steering switch is ● ECM
stuck ON.

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CRJ
A
NOTE:
EC
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. C
4. Press ON/OFF(MAIN) switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Press ACCEL/RESUME switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds. D
6. Press COAST/SET switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
7. Press CANCEL switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
8. If DTC is detected, go to EC-512, "Diagnostic Procedure" . E
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. F

Wiring Diagram UBS00CRK
BBWA1368E

CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
● Idle speed
[Ignition switch: ON] D
Approximately 4V
● ASCD steering switch: OFF.
[Ignition switch ON]
Approximately 0V E
Approximately 4V
● ON/OFF(MAIN) switch: Released
F
Approximately 1V
● CANCEL switch: Pressed
[Ignition switch: ON] G
99 G/Y ASCD steering switch Approximately 4V
● CANCEL switch: Released
Approximately 2V
● COAST/SET switch: Pressed H
Approximately 4V
● COAST/SET switch: Released
I
Approximately 3V
● ACCEL/RESUME switch: Pressed
Approximately 4V J
● ACCEL/RESUME switch: Released

Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CRL
1. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “MAIN SW”, “RESUME/ACC SW”, “SET SW” and “CANCEL SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
3. Check each item indication under the following conditions.
Switch Monitor item Condition Indication
ON/OFF(MAIN) Pressed ON
MAIN SW
switch Released OFF
ACCEL/RESUME Pressed ON
RESUME/ACC SW
switch Released OFF
Pressed ON
COAST/SET switch SET SW
Released OFF
SEC006D
Pressed ON
CANCEL switch CANCEL SW
Released OFF
Without CONSULT-II
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 99 and ground with press-
ing each button.
Switch Condition Voltage [V]
Pressed Approx. 0
ON/OFF(MAIN) switch
Released Approx. 4
Pressed Approx. 3
ACCEL/RESUME switch
Released Approx. 4
Pressed Approx. 2
COAST/SET switch PBIB0311E
Released Approx. 4
Pressed Approx. 1
CANCEL switch
Released Approx. 4
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Disconnect combination switch harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between combination switch terminal
15 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
BBIA0362E


● Harness connectors E19, F33 EC
● Combination switch (spiral cable)
● Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch
C
4. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT D
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 99 and combination switch terminal 14.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5. G
Check the following. H
● Combination switch (spiral cable)
● Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch I
J
6. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace ASCD steering switch. L

Refer to EC-125, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . M
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00CRM
ASCD STEERING SWITCH

1. Disconnect combination switch (spiral cable).
2. Check continuity between ASCD steering switch terminals 14
and 15 with pushing each switch.
Switch Condition Resistance [Ω]
Pressed Approx. 0
ON/OFF(MAIN) switch
Released Approx. 4,000
Pressed Approx. 660
COAST/SET switch
PBIB1673E

Switch Condition Resistance [Ω]

Pressed Approx. 1,480
ACCEL/RESUME switch
Pressed Approx. 250
CANCEL switch

DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH PFP:25320

A
Component Description UBS00CRN
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned

OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of EC
the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal).
C
BBIA0373E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CRO

BRAKE SW 1 ● Brake pedal: Fully released ON
● Ignition switch: ON
(ASCD brake switch) ● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
G
BRAKE SW 2 ● Brake pedal: Fully released OFF
(stop lamp switch) ● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CRP

H

I
NOTE:
If DTC P 1572 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to
EC-349, "DTC P0605 ECM"
J
(The stop lamp switch circuit is open or
shorted.) K
When the vehicle speed is above 30 km/h (The ASCD brake switch circuit is open or
P1572 (19 MPH), ON signals from the stop lamp shorted.) L
ASCD brake switch
1572 switch and the ASCD brake switch are sent ● Stop lamp switch
to the ECM at the same time.
● ASCD brake switch
● Incorrect stop lamp switch installation M
● Incorrect ASCD brake switch installation
● ECM

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CRQ
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Steps 3 and 4 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a
road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine (VDC switch OFF).
3. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following conditions.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-518, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

If DTC is not detected, go to the following step.
4. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following conditions.
Depress the brake pedal for more than
Driving location five seconds so as not to come off from
the above-mentioned condition.
WITH GST

Wiring Diagram UBS00CRR
EC
BBWA1364E

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (11 - 14V)

Approximately 0V
● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
108 BR/W ASCD brake switch
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CRS
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions.
CONDITION INDICATION
When brake pedal is depressed OFF
When brake pedal is fully released ON
SEC011D
Without CONSULT-II
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When brake pedal is depressed Approximately 0V
When brake pedal is fully released Battery voltage
MBIB0061E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.

2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II A

With CONSULT-II
Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
EC
When brake pedal is released OFF
When brake pedal is depressed ON C
SEC013D E
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions. F
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When brake pedal is released Approximately 0V
G
When brake pedal is depressed Battery voltage
I
PBIB1537E
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 7.
K

3. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
BBIA0373E
4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0857E

● Fuse block (J/B) connector M4
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse
5. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch.

7. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
EC
BBIA0373E
E
3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. G
NG >> GO TO 8.
H
PBIB0117E

● Harness connectors M31, E152 J
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and fuse K
L
9. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. M
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
10. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH

Refer to EC-523, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace stop lamp switch.


>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00CRT
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH A

3. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals EC
1 and 2 under the following conditions.
Condition Continuity C
When brake pedal is fully released. Should exist.
When brake pedal is depressed. Should not exist.
D
If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-6,
"BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.
E
PBIB1536E
STOP LAMP SWITCH

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. F
3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1
and 2 under the following conditions. G
Condition Continuity
When brake pedal is fully released. Should not exist.
H
When brake pedal is depressed. Should exist.
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6,

"BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again. I
PBIB0118E

DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH PFP:32006
Component Description UBS00CRY
When the gear position is P or N, park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON.

TCM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists.
Then the TCM sends the PNP switch signal to the ECM via combination meter.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CRZ

Shift lever: P or N ON
P/N POSI SW ● Ignition switch: ON
Shift lever: Except above OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CS0
[The park/neutral position (PNP) switch
The signal of the park/neutral position (PNP) circuit is open or shorted.]
P1706 Park/neutral position
switch is not changed in the process of engine ● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
1706 switch
starting and driving.
● TCM
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CS1
CAUTION:
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” signal under the follow-
ing conditions.
Position (Selector lever) Known-good signal
N or P position ON
Except the above position OFF

3. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. SEF212Y

onds.
COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F)
B/FUEL SCHDL More than 2.0 msec
. SEF213Y

Overall Function Check UBS00CS2
A
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. During this
check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST EC
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 102 (PNP switch signal)
and ground under the following conditions. C
Condition (Gear position) Voltage V (Known good data)
P or N position Approx. 0
D
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Except the above position
(11 - 14V)
3. If NG, go to EC-527, "Diagnostic Procedure" . E
MBIB0043E

Wiring Diagram UBS00CS3
BBWA1185E

CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Ignition switch: ON] C
Approximately 0V
● Shift lever: P or N
102 GR/R PNP switch
● Except the above gear position (11 - 14V) D
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CS4
1. CHECK DTC WITH TCM E
Refer to AT-36, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)" .

OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM G
Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it to START.

Does starter motor operate? H
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> Refer to SC-10, "STARTING SYSTEM" . I
3. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. J
2. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
K
4. Check harness continuity between TCM terminal 9 and combination meter terminal 39.
Continuity should exist. L
OK or NG
M
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

● Harness for open or short between TCM and combination meter

5. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and combination meter terminal 40.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

● Harness for open or short between ECM and combination meter

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8. REPLACE COMBINATION METER

>> INSPECTION END

DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH PFP:25320

A
Description UBS00CS5
Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed.
This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving. EC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CS6

C
BRAKE SW ● Ignition switch: ON
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON D
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CS7
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. E
● Harness or connectors F
P1805 A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for an (Stop lamp switch circuit is open or
Brake switch shorted.)
1805 extremely long time while the vehicle is driving.
● Stop lamp switch
G
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode.
H
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a small range.
Therefore, acceleration will be poor.
I
Vehicle condition Driving condition
When engine is idling Normal
When accelerating Poor acceleration J
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CS8
WITH CONSULT-II K
2. Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds.
3. Erase the DTC with CONSULT-II. L
. M
SEF058Y
WITH GST

Wiring Diagram UBS00CS9
BBWA0906E

CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Ignition switch: OFF] C
Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (11 - 14V) D
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CSA
1. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT E

2. Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal. F
Brake pedal Stop lamp
Fully released Not illuminated
G
Depressed Illuminated
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. H
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT I

L
BBIA0373E
2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0117E


● 10A fuse
● Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and fuse
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00CSB
STOP LAMP SWITCH A

EC
D
BBIA0373E
2. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 E

under the following conditions.
Conditions Continuity
F
Brake pedal fully released Should not exist.
Brake pedal depressed Should exist.
3. If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6, G
PBIB0118E H

DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR PFP:18002
Component Description UBS00CSC
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end

of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelera-
tor position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from
these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these
signals.
PBIB1741E
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine oper-
ation such as fuel cut.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CSD


ACCEL SEN1

ACCEL SEN2*

CLSD THL POS
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differ from ECM terminal voltage.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CSE

NOTE:
If DTC P2122 or P2123 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229.
Refer to EC-422, "DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY" .
P2122 Accelerator pedal position An excessively low voltage from the APP sen- ● Harness or connectors
2122 sensor 1 circuit low input sor 1 is sent to ECM. (The APP sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.)
P2123 Accelerator pedal position An excessively high voltage from the APP sen-
2123 sensor 1 circuit high input sor 1 is sent to ECM. (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CSF
A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
D
SEF058Y
WITH GST G

Wiring Diagram UBS00CSG
BBWA1168E

CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor ground
82 B/R ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
Sensor ground
83 G/W ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply E
(APP sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2) F
● Accelerator pedal: Fully released G
Accelerator pedal position
98 G/R
H
I
106 BR/W
● Engine stopped 4.2 - 4.8V J
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CSH

K
L
BBIA0354E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

connector.
BBIA0361E
3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 7 and ground with

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
PBIB2070E
3. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 82 and APP sensor terminal 1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY A

3. Perform EC-43, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . EC
C
>> INSPECTION END

D
>> INSPECTION END E
Component Inspection UBS00CSI
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR

F
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 sig- G
nal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the fol-
lowing conditions.
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage H
106 Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1) Fully depressed 4.2 - 4.8V
I
MBIB0023E
J
4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step.
6. Perform EC-43, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . K
Removal and Installation UBS00CSJ
L
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" .
M

DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR PFP:18002
Component Description UBS00CSK

signals.
PBIB1741E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CSL


ACCEL SEN1

ACCEL SEN2*

CLSD THL POS
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CSM

P2127 Accelerator pedal position An excessively low voltage from the APP ● Harness or connectors
2127 sensor 2 circuit low input sensor 2 is sent to ECM. (APP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.)
(TP sensor circuit is shorted.)
P2128 Accelerator pedal position An excessively high voltage from the APP (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2)
2128 sensor 2 circuit high input sensor 2 is sent to ECM.
(TP sensor)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CSN
A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
D
SEF058Y
WITH GST G

Wiring Diagram UBS00CSO
BBWA1169E

CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
(TP sensor)
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
82 B/R ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V D
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
83 G/W ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V E
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1) F
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
98 G/R H
I
106 BR/W J
● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed K
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CSP
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS L

M
BBIA0354E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

connector.
BBIA0361E
3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 6 and ground with

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB2069E
3. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 7 and ECM terminal 91.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 6.

6. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR A

3. Perform EC-43, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . EC
>> INSPECTION END

C
7. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G
8. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 98 and APP sensor terminal 5. H
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. J
9. CHECK APP SENSOR K

OK or NG
L
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.
10. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY M

>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00CSQ

3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 sig-
lowing conditions.

MBIB0023E

Removal and Installation UBS00CSR
ACCELERATOR PEDAL

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR

A
Component Description UBS00CSS

throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to EC
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addi- C
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig- D
PBIB0145E
tion.
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CST

F
THRTL SEN2* Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V G
● Shift lever: D
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CSU

H

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause I
● Harness or connector
(TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or
Throttle position sensor Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM shorted.) J
P2135 (APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)
circuit range/performance compared with the signals from TP sensor 1
2135
problem and TP sensor 2. ● Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
K
FAIL-SAFE MODE
L
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 M
degrees.

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CSV
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
Wiring Diagram UBS00CSW
EC
BBWA1165E

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
● Shift lever: D
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Shift lever: D
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Shift lever: D
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
● Shift lever: D
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CSX

BBIA0354E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I A

EC
D
BBIA0371E
3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
G
PBIB2065E H


OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 4.
L
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 6.

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR

>> INSPECTION END
7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal14, ECM
terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 3.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.

>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
Component Inspection UBS00CSY
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR A

69 (TP sensor 2signal) and engine ground under the following C
conditions.
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage D
Fully released Less than 4.75V E
69
F
step.
8. Perform EC-43, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . G
Removal and Installation UBS00CSZ

Refer to EM-15, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . H

DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR PFP:18002
Component Description UBS00CT0

signals.
PBIB1741E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CT1


ACCEL SEN1

ACCEL SEN2*

CLSD THL POS
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00CT2

NOTE:
EC-422, "DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY" .
● Harness or connector
(APP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
Accelerator pedal position Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM (TP sensor circuit is shorted.)
P2138
sensor circuit range/per- compared with the signals from APP sensor 1 ● Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 and 2
2138
formance problem and APP sensor 2.
(TP sensor)
● ECM pin terminal
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00CT3
A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
D
SEF058Y
WITH GST G

Wiring Diagram UBS00CT4
BBWA1170E

CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
(TP sensor)
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
82 B/R ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V D
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
83 G/W ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V E
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1) F
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
98 G/R H
I
106 BR/W J
● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed K
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CT5
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS L

M
BBIA0354E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK APP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

connector.
BBIA0361E
3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminals 6, 7 and ground

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB2083E

3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 7 and ECM terminal 91.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit.

● ECM pin terminal

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 6.

6. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR A

3. Perform EC-43, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . EC
>> INSPECTION END

C
7. CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 82 and APP sensor terminal 1, ECM terminal 83 and
APP sensor terminal 3. E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. G
8. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT H
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 2, ECM terminal 98 and
APP sensor terminal 5.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. I
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
K
Refer to EC-539, "Component Inspection" . L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10. M

>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00CT6

3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 sig-
lowing conditions.

MBIB0023E

Removal and Installation UBS00CT7
ACCELERATOR PEDAL

IGNITION SIGNAL
IGNITION SIGNAL PFP:22448

A
Component Description UBS00CT8
IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR

The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power transistor turns EC
on and off the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil
secondary circuit.
BBIA0359E
F

IGNITION SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram UBS00CT9
BBWA1187E

IGNITION SIGNAL
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0 - 1.5V
111 W/B
(Self shut-off) D
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
E
120 BR (11 - 14V)

IGNITION SIGNAL
BBWA1188E

IGNITION SIGNAL
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
0 - 0.2V
[Engine is running]
D
● Idle speed
NOTE:
46 L/R Ignition signal No. 7 idle. E
PBIB0044E
60 GR/R Ignition signal No. 5
61 O/W Ignition signal No. 3
0.1 - 0.4V
62 Y/R Ignition signal No. 1 F
[Engine is running]
PBIB0045E
H

IGNITION SIGNAL
BBWA1189E

IGNITION SIGNAL
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
0 - 0.2V
[Engine is running]
D
● Idle speed
NOTE:
65 G/R Ignition signal No. 8 idle. E
PBIB0044E
79 V/W Ignition signal No. 6
80 W/R Ignition signal No. 4
0.1 - 0.4V
81 W/G Ignition signal No. 2 F
[Engine is running]
PBIB0045E
H
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CTA
I
1. CHECK ENGINE START
Turn ignition switch OFF, and restart engine.
Is engine running? J
Yes or No
Yes (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2.
Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3. K
No >> GO TO 4.
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION L

With CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II. M
speed drop.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 10.
PBIB0133E

IGNITION SIGNAL
3. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION

Without CONSULT-II
1. Let engine idle.
2. Read the voltage signal between ECM terminals 46, 60, 61, 62,
65, 79, 80, 81 and ground with an oscilloscope.
3. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as
shown below.
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle.
PBIB2094E
PBIB0044E
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 10.
4. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Go to EC-126, "POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
CUIT" .
MBIB0034E

IGNITION SIGNAL
5. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II A

2. Disconnect condenser harness connector.
BBIA0358E
E
4. Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with
Voltage: Battery voltage F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. G
NG >> GO TO 6.
H
PBIB0624E
6. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III I

2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector E119.
J
3. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 4 and condenser terminal 1.
Continuity should exist. K
OK or NG
L
OK >> Go to EC-126, "POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
NG >> GO TO 7.
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART M

● Harness for open or short between ignition coil and IPDM E/R

IGNITION SIGNAL
8. CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

2. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and engine ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
9. CHECK CONDENSER
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace condenser.
10. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV

3. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
BBIA0359E

5. Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 3 and ground with
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.
PBIB0138E

● Harness for open or short between ignition coil and harness connector F32

IGNITION SIGNAL
12. CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
2. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and engine ground.

3. Also check harness for short to power. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. D
13. CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. E
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 46, 60, 61, 62, 65, 79, 80, 81 and ignition coil terminal
1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. F

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. H
14. CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR

Refer to EC-571, "Component Inspection" . I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
J
NG >> Replace ignition coil with power transistor.

K
>> INSPECTION END L

Component Inspection UBS00CTB
IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR

2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as follows.
1 and 2 Except 0 or ∞
1 and 3
Except 0
2 and 3
PBIB0847E
CONDENSER

IGNITION SIGNAL
3. Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2.

Resistance Above 1 MΩ at 25°C (77°F)
PBIB0794E
Removal and Installation UBS00CTC
IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR

Refer to EM-26, "IGNITION COIL" .

INJECTOR CIRCUIT
INJECTOR CIRCUIT PFP:16600

A
Component Description UBS00CTD
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the injector circuit, the coil in the injector is EC
energized. The energized coil pulls the needle valve back and allows
fuel to flow through the injector into the intake manifold. The amount
of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse duration. Pulse
duration is the length of time the injector remains open. The ECM C
controls the injection pulse duration based on engine fuel needs.
SEF375Z
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CTE

B/FUEL SCHDL G
● Shift lever: N 2,000 rpm 3.0 - 4.2 msec
● No load
H
INJ PULSE-B1 ● Air conditioner switch: OFF
INJ PULSE-B2 ● Shift lever: N 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec
● No load
I

INJECTOR CIRCUIT
Wiring Diagram UBS00CTF
BBWA1190E

INJECTOR CIRCUIT
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
D
● Idle speed
21 O/L Injector No. 5 NOTE:
22 BR Injector No. 3 The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle. E
23 GR/W Injector No. 1
40 Y/G Injector No. 6 PBIB0042E
41 P Injector No. 4 BATTERY VOLTAGE F

42 L Injector No. 2
(11 - 14V)
44 O Injector No. 7
63 G Injector No. 8 [Engine is running]
G
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
H
PBIB0043E
I
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CTG
1. INSPECTION START
J
Turn ignition switch to START.
Is any cylinder ignited?
Yes or No K
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.
L

INJECTOR CIRCUIT

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
CONSULT-II.
speed drop.
PBIB0133E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
PBIB1986E
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 3.

INJECTOR CIRCUIT
3. CHECK INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

2. Disconnect injector harness connector.
EC
BBIA0374E
E
4. Check voltage between injector terminal 1 and ground with

OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
H
PBIB0582E
I
● IPDM E/R connector E119
● 15A fuse K
● Harness for open or short between injector and fuse
L
5. CHECK INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

M
3. Check harness continuity between injector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 40, 41, 42, 44, 63.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

INJECTOR CIRCUIT
6. CHECK INJECTOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace injector.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00CTH
INJECTOR
1. Disconnect injector harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.
Resistance: 11.5 - 12.5Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
PBIB1727E
Removal and Installation UBS00CTI
INJECTOR

FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT PFP:17042

A
Description UBS00CTJ
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator EC
Engine speed*
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay
Battery Battery voltage* C
*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON to improve engine
D
startability. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows
that the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the engine speed signal is not received when
the ignition switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and prevents battery discharging,
thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump E
relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump.
Condition Fuel pump operation
Ignition switch is turned to ON. Operates for 1 second. F
Engine running and cranking Operates.
When engine is stopped Stops in 1.5 seconds.
G
Except as shown above Stops.
H
A turbine type design fuel pump is used in the furl tank.
K
BBIA0402E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CTK
Specification data are reference values. L

● For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON
ON M
FUEL PUMP RLY ● Engine running or cranking
● Except above conditions OFF

FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
Wiring Diagram UBS00CTL
BBWA1365E

FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
● For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON 0 - 1.5V
[Engine is running]
113 GR Fuel pump relay
[Ignition switch: ON] D
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than 1 second after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch ON.
E
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CTM

1. Turn ignition switch ON. F
2. Pinch fuel feed hose with two fingers.
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel feed hose
for 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON. G
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2. H
BBIA0357E
2. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I J

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. K
CONSULT-II or tester. L

OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB1187E

FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
3. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

4. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 46 and ground with
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 12.
PBIB2084E

● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and ECM
5. CHECK CONDENSER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

BBIA0388E
5. Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with

Voltage: Battery voltage should exist for 1 sec-
ond after ignition switch is turned ON.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB0624E

FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
6. CHECK 15A FUSE A

3. Check 15A fuse. EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace fuse. C
7. CHECK CONDENSER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II FOR OPEN AND SHORT

D
2. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 13 and condenser terminal 1.
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
G
8. CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 1 and ground. H
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. J
9. CHECK CONDENSER
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. L
NG >> Replace condenser.
10. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT M
2. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness con-
nector.
4. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 13 and
“fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 1, “fuel level sen-
sor unit and fuel pump” terminal 3 and ground.
BBIA0583E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.

FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT

● Harness for open or short between fuel pump and IPDM E/R
● Harness for open or short between fuel pump and ground

OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R.
Component Inspection UBS00CTN
FUEL PUMP
1. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector.
2. Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump
terminals 1 and 3.
Resistance: Approximately 1.0Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
SEC918C
CONDENSER
3. Check resistance between condenser terminals as 1 and 2.
Resistance Above 1 MΩ at 25°C (77°F)
PBIB0794E
Removal and Installation UBS00CTO
FUEL PUMP

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR PFP:92136

A
Component Description UBS00CTP
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the liquid tank of the

air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume EC
pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The
voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.
C
BBIA0356E
H
SEF099XA

Wiring Diagram UBS00CTQ
BBWA1192E

CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
49 R/Y (Refrigerant pressure sen- [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sor)
[Engine is running]
D
● Idle speed
70 B/W Refrigerant pressure sensor 1.0 - 4.0V
● Both A/C switch and blower switch are ON.
F
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CTR
1. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION G

2. Turn A/C switch and blower switch ON.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 70 and ground with CON- H
SULT-II or tester.
Voltage: 1.0 - 4.0V I
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2. J
K
PBIB1188E

2. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn A/C switch and blower switch OFF.
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector.
BBIA0356E
5. Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1

and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0188E

● Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
4. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.


6. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 70 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 2.
EC
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
D
● Harness connectors E5, F14 E
F

G
OK or NG
OK >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor. H
Removal and Installation UBS00CTS
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR I

Refer to ATC-169, "Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor" or MTC-145, "Removal and
Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor" .
J

ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL PFP:25350
Description UBS00CTT
The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, rear window defogger switch signal, etc.) is transferred
through the CAN communication line from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CTU

Rear window defogger switch is ON
ON
and/or lighting switch is in 2nd.
LOAD SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON
Rear window defogger switch is OFF
OFF
and lighting switch is OFF.
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CTV
1. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I

2. Connect CONSULT-II and select “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Select “LOAD SIGNAL” and check indication under the following
conditions.
Condition Indication
Rear window defogger switch ON ON
Rear window defogger switch OFF OFF
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0103E
2. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II

Check “LOAD SIGNAL” indication under the following conditions.
Condition Indication
Lighting switch ON at 2nd position ON
Lighting switch OFF OFF
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0103E
3. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM

Refer to GW-73, "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER" .
>> INSPECTION END
4. CHECK HEADLAMP SYSTEM

Refer to LT-6, "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" , or LT-33, "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYS-
TEM -" .
>> INSPECTION END

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH PFP:25320

A
Component Description UBS00CTW
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned

OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of EC
the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal).
C
BBIA0373E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CTX

BRAKE SW 1 ● Brake pedal: Fully released ON
(ASCD brake switch) ● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
G
BRAKE SW 2 ● Brake pedal: Fully released OFF
(stop lamp switch) ● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
H

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Wiring Diagram UBS00CTY
BBWA1363E

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 0V
● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (11 - 14V) D
Approximately 0V
● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
108 BR/W ASCD brake switch E
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CTZ F

1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I
With CONSULT-II G
2. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions. H
When brake pedal is depressed OFF I
When brake pedal is fully released ON
K
SEC011D
Without CONSULT-II
L
M
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When brake pedal is depressed Approximately 0V
When brake pedal is fully released Battery voltage
MBIB0061E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II

With CONSULT-II
Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
When brake pedal is released OFF
When brake pedal is depressed ON
SEC013D
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions.
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When brake pedal is released Approximately 0V
When brake pedal is depressed Battery voltage
PBIB1537E
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 7.

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
3. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

BBIA0373E
E
4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. G
NG >> GO TO 4.
H
PBIB0857E

● Harness connectors M31, 152 J
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse K
L
5. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch.

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
7. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

BBIA0373E
3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground

with CONSULT -II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.
PBIB0117E

● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and fuse
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT A

>> INSPECTION END EC
Component Inspection UBS00CU0
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH C

3. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals D
1 and 2 under the following conditions.
E
When brake pedal is fully released. Should exist.
When brake pedal is depressed. Should not exist.
If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-6, F

PBIB1536E G
STOP LAMP SWITCH
H
3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1
and 2 under the following conditions.
I
When brake pedal is fully released. Should not exist.
When brake pedal is depressed. Should exist. J
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6,

K
PBIB0118E

ASCD INDICATOR
ASCD INDICATOR PFP:24814
Component Description UBS00CU1
ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. Lamp has two indicators, CRUISE and
SET, and is integrated in combination meter.
CRUISE indicator illuminates when ON/OFF switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicated that
ASCD system is ready for operation.
SET indicator illuminates when following conditions are met.
● CRUISE indicator is illuminated.
● SET switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON while vehicle speed is within the range of ASCD set-
ting.
SET indicator remains lit during ASCD control.
Refer to EC-617, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00CU2
Specification data are reference value.

at the 1st time → at the 2nd time
● ON/OFF switch: ON ● COAST/SET switch: Pressed ON
SET LAMP ● When vehicle speed is

between 40 km/h (25 MPH) ● COAST/SET switch: Released OFF
and 144 km/h (89 MPH)

ASCD INDICATOR
Wiring Diagram UBS00CU3
EC
BBWA1195E

ASCD INDICATOR
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CU4

Check ASCD indicator under the following conditions.
ASCD INDICATOR CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● ON/OFF(MAIN) switch: Pressed at
the 1st time → at the 2nd time
● ON/OFF(MAIN) switch: ON ● COAST/SET switch: Pressed ON
SET LAMP ● When vehicle speed is between

40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h ● COAST/SET switch: Released OFF
(89 MPH)
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK DTC
Check that DTC U1000 or U1001 is not displayed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-133, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN
COMMUNICATION LINE" .
3. CHECK DTC WITH COMBINATION METER

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Go to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" .

>> INSPECTION END

MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR PFP:24814

A
Wiring Diagram UBS00CU5
EC
BBWA1196E

MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR
BBWA1197E

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM PFP:14950

A
Description UBS00CU6
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
EC
G
PBIB1631E
The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel H
system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister.
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the
vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank. I
The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the
engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the
engine operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
proportionally regulated as the air flow increases. J
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating and
idling.
K

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING
PBIB2053E

EC
BBIA0404E

Component Inspection UBS00CU7
EVAP CANISTER
Check EVAP canister as follows:
1. Block port B .
2. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port C .
3. Release blocked port B .
4. Apply vacuum pressure to port B and check that vacuum pres-
sure exists at the ports A and C .
5. Block port A and B .
6. Apply pressure to port C and check that there is no leakage.
BBIA0352E
FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)
1. Wipe clean valve housing.
SEF445Y
2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.

Pressure: 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2 , 2.22
- 2.90 psi)
Vacuum: −6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2 ,
−0.87 to −0.48 psi)
3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly.
CAUTION:
Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incor-
rect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. SEF943S

Refer to EC-283 .
Refer to EC-223 .
Refer to EC-290 .
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-297 .

EVAP SERVICE PORT

Positive pressure is delivered to the EVAP system through the EVAP A
service port. If fuel vapor leakage in the EVAP system occurs, use a
leak detector to locate the leak.
EC
SEF462UA
D
Removal and Installation UBS00CU8
EVAP CANISTER E
Tighten EVAP canister as shown in the figure.
K
BBIA0349E

1. Turn EVAP canister vent control valve counterclockwise. L
2. Remove the EVAP canister vent control valve.
M
BBIA0350E
How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage UBS00CU9
CAUTION:
● Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in EVAP system.
NOTE:
● Do not start engine.
● Improper installation of EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause a leak.

WITH CONSULT-II
1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port.
2. Also attach the pressure pump and hose to the EVAP service port adapter.
4. Select the “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT
MODE” with CONSULT-II.
5. Touch “START”. A bar graph (Pressure indicating display) will
appear on the screen.
PEF838U
6. Apply positive pressure to the EVAP system until the pressure

indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
7. Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure
pump.
PEF917U
8. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-604, "EVAP-

ORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
SEF200U
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP ser-
vice port.
2. Also attach the pressure pump with pressure gauge to the EVAP
service port adapter.
SEF462UA

3. Apply battery voltage to between the terminals of EVAP canister vent control valve to make a closed
EVAP system. A
EC
D
BBIA0403E
4. To locate the leak, deliver positive pressure to the EVAP system until pressure gauge points reach 1.38 to
2.76 kPa (0.014 to 0.028 kg/cm2 , 0.2 to 0.4 psi). E
5. Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure pump.
6. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-604, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
F

ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) PFP:00032
System Description UBS00CUA
PBIB1068E
From the beginning of refueling, the air and vapor inside the fuel tank go through refueling EVAP vapor cut
valve and EVAP/ORVR line to the EVAP canister. The vapor is absorbed by the EVAP canister and the air is
released to the atmosphere.
When the refueling has reached the full level of the fuel tank, the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve is closed and
refueling is stopped because of auto shut-off. The vapor which was absorbed by the EVAP canister is purged
during driving.
WARNING:
When conducting inspections below, be sure to observe the following:
● Put a “CAUTION: INFLAMMABLE” sign in workshop.
● Do not smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from work area.
● Be sure to furnish the workshop with a CO2 fire extinguisher.
CAUTION:
● Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following procedures:
– Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put lid on securely.
– Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-45, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
– Disconnect battery ground cable.
● Always replace O-ring when the fuel gauge retainer is removed.
● Do not kink or twist hose and tube when they are installed.
● Do not tighten hose and clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses.
● After installation, run engine and check for fuel leaks at connection.
● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically.
Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire.

Diagnostic Procedure UBS00CUB
SYMPTOM: FUEL ODOR FROM EVAP CANISTER IS STRONG. A

1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor EC
attached.
2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. D
NG >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER E

Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
Yes or No
F
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> GO TO 5.
H
BBIA0351E
3. REPLACE EVAP CANISTER I
Replace EVAP canister with a new one.

J
>> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART K

Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection.
L
>> Repair or replace EVAP hose.

M
OK or NG

SYMPTOM: CANNOT REFUEL/FUEL ODOR FROM THE FUEL FILLER OPENING IS STRONG
WHILE REFUELING.
attached.
2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.

Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> GO TO 5.
BBIA0351E
3. REPLACE EVAP CANISTER

Replace EVAP canister with a new one.
>> GO TO 4.

Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection.
>> Repair or replace EVAP hose.
5. CHECK VENT HOSES AND VENT TUBES

Check hoses and tubes between EVAP canister and refueling control valve for clogging, kink, looseness and
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK FILLER NECK TUBE

Check recirculation line for clogging, dents and cracks.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace filler neck tube.

7. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE A

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. EC
8. CHECK FUEL FILLER TUBE C

Check filler neck tube and hose connected to the fuel tank for clogging, dents and cracks.
OK or NG
D
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace fuel filler tube.
9. CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-I E
Check one-way valve for clogging.

OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Repair or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank.
G
10. CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-II
1. Make sure that fuel is drained from the tank.
H
2. Remove fuel filler tube and hose.
3. Check one-way fuel valve for operation as follows.
When a stick is inserted, the valve should open, when removing
stick it should close. I
Do not drop any material into the tank.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END J
NG >> Replace fuel filler tube or replace one-way fuel valve
with fuel tank.
K
SEF665U
Component Inspection UBS00CUC L

REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-10, "FUEL TANK" . M
2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
a. Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge retainer.
b. Connect a spare fuel hose, one side to fuel gauge retainer where the hose was removed and the other
side to a fuel container.
c. Drain fuel using “FUEL PUMP RELAY” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that
the air flows freely into the tank.
4. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
a. Connect vacuum pump to hose end.
b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit.
Always replace O-ring with new one.
c. Put fuel tank upside down.

d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer
remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable.
BBIA0401E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-10, "FUEL TANK" .
2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
a. Remove fuel gauge retainer.
b. Drain fuel from the tank using a handy pump into a fuel container.
3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that
the air flows freely into the tank.
4. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
a. Connect vacuum pump to hose end.
b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit.
Always replace O-ring with new one.
c. Put fuel tank upside down.
d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer
remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable.
BBIA0401E

POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION PFP:11810

A
Description UBS00CUD
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
EC
G
PBIB0062E
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold. H

The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake
manifold.
During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the PCV I
valve.
Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of ventilating air.
The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air passes
through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. J
Under full-throttle condition, the manifold vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve.
The flow goes through the hose connection in the reverse direction.
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not K
meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go
through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all condi-
tions.
L
PBIB1588E
Component Inspection UBS00CUE
PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE

With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve ventilation hose from
PCV valve; if the valve is working properly, a hissing noise will be
heard as air passes through it and a strong vacuum should be felt
immediately when a finger is placed over valve inlet.
PBIB1589E

POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE

1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks.
2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose
cannot be freed of obstructions, replace.
S-ET277

AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) PFP:18930

A
System Description UBS00CUF

Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator EC
ASCD brake switch Brake pedal operation
Stop lamp switch Brake pedal operation
ASCD steering switch ASCD steering switch operation C
Park/Neutral position (PNP) ASCD vehicle speed control
Gear position actuator
switch
D
Combination meter* Vehicle speed
TCM* Powertrain revolution
This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. E
BASIC ASCD SYSTEM
Refer to Owner's Manual for ASCD operating instructions.
Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) allows a driver to keep vehicle at predetermined constant speed F
without pressing accelerator pedal. Driver can set vehicle speed in advance between approximately 40 km/h
(25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH).
ECM controls throttle angle of electric throttle control actuator to regulate engine speed. G
Operation status of ASCD is indicated by CRUISE indicator and SET indicator in combination meter. If any
malfunction occurs in ASCD system, it automatically deactivates control.
SET OPERATION H
Press ON/OFF(MAIN) switch. (The CRUISE indicator in combination meter illuminates.)
When vehicle speed reaches a desired speed between approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89
MPH), press COAST/SET switch. (Then SET indicator in combination meter illuminates.) I
ACCEL OPERATION
If the ACCEL/RESUME switch is pressed during cruise control driving, increase the vehicle speed until the
switch is released or vehicle speed reaches maximum speed controlled by the system. J
And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
CANCEL OPERATION
K
When any of following conditions exist, cruise operation will be canceled.
● CANCEL switch is pressed
● More than 2 switches at ASCD steering switch are pressed at the same time (Set speed will be cleared) L
● Brake pedal is depressed
● Selector lever is changed to N, P, R position
● Vehicle speed decreased to 13 km/h (8 MPH) lower than the set speed M
● VDC/TCS system is operated
When the ECM detects any of the following conditions, the ECM will cancel the cruise operation and inform
the driver by blinking indicator lamp.
● Engine coolant temperature is slightly higher than the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp may
blink slowly.
When the engine coolant temperature decreases to the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp will
stop blinking and the cruise operation will be able to work by pressing COAST/SET switch or ACCEL/
RESUME switch.
● Malfunction for some self-diagnoses regarding ASCD control: SET lamp will blink quickly.
If ON/OFF(MAIN) switch is turned to OFF during ASCD is activated, all of ASCD operations will be canceled
and vehicle speed memory will be erased.
COAST OPERATION
When the COAST/SET switch is pressed during cruise control driving, decrease vehicle set speed until the
switch is released. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.

AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
RESUME OPERATION
When the ACCEL/RESUME switch is pressed after cancel operation other than pressing ON/OFF(MAIN)
switch is performed, vehicle speed will return to last set speed. To resume vehicle set speed, vehicle condition
must meet following conditions.
● Brake pedal is released
● A/T selector lever is in other than P and N positions
● Vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH) and less than 144 km/h (89 MPH)
Component Description UBS00CUG
ASCD STEERING SWITCH

Refer to EC-508 .
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Refer to EC-515 , and EC-591 .
STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-515 , EC-529 and EC-591 .
Refer to EC-363 , EC-365 , EC-371 and EC-376 .
ASCD INDICATOR
Refer to EC-598 .

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) PFP:00030

A
Fuel Pressure UBS00CUH
Fuel pressure at idling kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) Approximately 350 (3.57, 51)
EC
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing UBS00CUI
Target idle speed No-load*1 (in P or N position) 650±50 rpm

C
Air conditioner: ON In P or N position 700 rpm or more
Ignition timing In P or N position 15° ± 5° BTDC
*1: Under the following conditions: D
● Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger)
● Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position E
Calculated Load Value UBS00CUJ
Condition Calculated load value % (Using CONSULT-II or GST) F

At idle 14.0 - 33.0
At 2,500 rpm 12.0 - 25.0
G
Mass Air Flow Sensor UBS00CUK
Supply voltage Battery voltage (11 - 14V)

H
Output voltage at idle 1.1 - 1.4V*
3.0 - 9.0 g·m/sec at idle*
Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-II or GST)
9.0 - 28.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm*
I
*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no-load.
Intake Air Temperature Sensor UBS00CUL

J
25 (77) 1.9 - 2.1
80 (176) 0.31 - 0.37 K
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor UBS00CUM
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ L

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
M
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
A/F Sensor 1 Heater UBS00CUN
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 3.3 - 4.3Ω
Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater UBS00CUO
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) UBS00CUP

Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) UBS00CUQ

Throttle Control Motor UBS00CUR
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 1 - 15Ω

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Injector UBS00CUS
Fuel Pump UBS00CUT
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 1.0Ω

2004 Nissan Armada 46054

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2004 Nissan Armada 46054

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2004 Nissan Armada 46054

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the document about?

What is the document about?

What components are discussed in the document?

What components are discussed in the document?

B ENGINE

Revision: January 2005 EC-1 2004 Pathfinder Armada

Revision: January 2005 EC-2 2004 Pathfinder Armada

Revision: January 2005 EC-3 2004 Pathfinder Armada

Revision: January 2005 EC-4 2004 Pathfinder Armada

Revision: January 2005 EC-5 2004 Pathfinder Armada

Revision: January 2005 EC-6 2004 Pathfinder Armada

Revision: January 2005 EC-7 2004 Pathfinder Armada

INDEX FOR DTC PFP:00024

Alphabetical Index UBS00CFD

CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001*4 2 — EC-133

Revision: January 2005 EC-8 2004 Pathfinder Armada

Revision: January 2005 EC-9 2004 Pathfinder Armada

Revision: January 2005 EC-10 2004 Pathfinder Armada

VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*5 P0720 0720 2 × AT-109

VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*5 P0500 0500 2 × EC-338 G

DTC No. Index UBS00CFE

Revision: January 2005 EC-11 2004 Pathfinder Armada

Revision: January 2005 EC-12 2004 Pathfinder Armada

Revision: January 2005 EC-13 2004 Pathfinder Armada

Revision: January 2005 EC-14 2004 Pathfinder Armada

● Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.

Revision: January 2005 EC-15 2004 Pathfinder Armada

● Do not disassemble ECM.

● When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten it

● When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or

tem malfunctions due to receiving external noise, degraded

● Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE),

Revision: January 2005 EC-16 2004 Pathfinder Armada

● After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform DTC

● B1 indicates the bank 1, B2 indicates the bank 2 as shown

Revision: January 2005 EC-17 2004 Pathfinder Armada

● Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines.

● Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting.

● When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure

When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:

Revision: January 2005 EC-18 2004 Pathfinder Armada

KV10117100 Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors E

(J44321) Checking fuel pressure

(J-44321-6) Connecting fuel pressure gauge to quick connec-

(J-45488) Remove fuel tube quick connectors in engine

Revision: January 2005 EC-19 2004 Pathfinder Armada

KV109E0080 Measuring the ECM signals with a circuit tester

(J-23688) Checking concentration of ethylene glycol in en-

Revision: January 2005 EC-20 2004 Pathfinder Armada

Commercial Service Tools UBS00CFK

Socket wrench Removing and installing engine coolant tempera-

Oxygen sensor thread Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before K

Revision: January 2005 EC-21 2004 Pathfinder Armada

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:23710

System Diagram UBS00CFL

Revision: January 2005 EC-22 2004 Pathfinder Armada

Vacuum Hose Drawing UBS00CFM

Refer to EC-22, "System Diagram" for Vacuum Control System.

Revision: January 2005 EC-23 2004 Pathfinder Armada